Pentax Camcorder K 7 User Manual

SLR Digital Camera  
Operating Manual  
For optimum camera performance, please read the  
Operating Manual before using the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
FOR USING YOUR CAMERA SAFELY  
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this product,  
we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following  
symbols.  
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause  
serious personal injuries.  
Warning  
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor  
Caution  
or medium personal injuries, or material losses.  
ABOUT THE CAMERA  
Warning  
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside the  
camera, with the risk of electric shock.  
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera,  
never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.  
• Wrapping the strap around your neck is dangerous. Take care that small children do  
not hang the strap over their necks.  
• Do not look directly at the sun through the camera with a telephoto lens attached, as  
viewing the sun may damage your eyes. Viewing the sun directly with a telephoto lens  
may lead to a loss of eyesight.  
If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use  
immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest PENTAX  
Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burn yourself.  
Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may occur.  
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperature  
burns when holding such portions for long periods.  
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not  
to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.  
• Depending on a user's physical condition, some users may experience itching, break  
out in a rash or suffer from eczema. If an abnormality occurs, immediately discontinue  
using the camera and seek medical attention.  
About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter  
Warning  
• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this  
product, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter  
not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter with  
an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera  
breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality  
occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.  
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service Center.  
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• If thunderstorm should be present during use of the battery charger, unplug the power  
cord and discontinue use. Continuing to use the product can cause damage to the  
equipment, fire or electrical shock.  
• Wipe off the plug of the power cord if it should become covered with dust. This can  
cause a fire.  
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL Certified power supply cord set, cord  
is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on  
male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other is  
provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial  
type configuration) or the equivalent.  
Caution  
• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord. Doing so  
may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX  
Service Center.  
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord is  
plugged in.  
• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with wet hands. This can cause an electric  
shock.  
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause equipment  
breakdown.  
• Do not use the battery charger to charge batteries other than the rechargeable  
lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Attempting to charge other types of batteries may cause  
an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.  
About the Battery  
Warning  
• Be sure to store the battery out of the reach of small children. Placing in mouth may  
cause an electrical shock.  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub  
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.  
Caution  
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an  
explosion or fire.  
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion  
or leakage.  
• The battery should be inserted correctly, observing (+) and (-) marks on the battery  
and the camera. Not inserting battery correctly may cause an explosion or a fire.  
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins to  
smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.  
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of the  
battery. When storing a battery removed from the camera, be sure to attach the  
provided protective cap to avoid shorting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion  
or fire.  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, wash the  
affected areas thoroughly with water.  
• Precautions for D-LI90 Battery Usage:  
- USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.  
- DO NOT INCINERATE.  
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.  
- DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.  
- DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F / 60°C).  
About the SD Memory Card  
Warning  
• Be sure to store the SD Memory Card out of the reach of small children.  
The SD Memory Card may be swallowed by mistake. Seek medical attention  
immediately if a memory card is accidentally swallowed.  
Care to be Taken During Handling  
Before Using Your Camera  
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network that is included in the package.  
This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.  
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working  
properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or when  
traveling). Pictures and sound cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or  
transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your  
camera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.  
About the Battery and Charger  
• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance. Avoid storing  
in high temperatures.  
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will  
over-discharge and shorten the battery’s usage span.  
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.  
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera is developed exclusively for the battery  
charger D-BC90. Do not use it with other devices.  
Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera  
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave the  
camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion to  
protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.  
• The temperature range for camera use is -10°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).  
• The monitor may appear black under high temperatures, but will return to normal as  
temperatures normalize.  
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid  
crystal properties, and is not a fault.  
• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of  
the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, removing the camera after  
temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.  
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts. These could  
cause a camera breakdown. Wipe dry any rain or water drops on the camera.  
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause breakage or  
malfunction.  
• Be careful not to over tighten the tripod screw when using a tripod.  
Cleaning Your Camera  
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner or alcohol benzene.  
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder. Never use a  
spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.  
• Please contact PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the CMOS  
sensor. (This will involve a fee.)  
Storing Your Camera  
• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high  
temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera. Remove from  
the case and store in a dry and well-ventilated location.  
Other Precautions  
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain high  
performance.  
Memory Card.  
• Please note that deleting the data recorded on an SD Memory Card or formatting an  
SD Memory Card using a camera or computer will not necessarily delete the data so  
that they cannot be recovered using off the shelf data recovery software. Such data  
should be handled and managed at your own risk.  
Regarding Product Registration  
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration,  
which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX  
website. Thank you for your cooperation.  
Refer to the provided “Quick Guide” for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Contents  
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Shooting (Preview) .................................................................... 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically Changed (Exposure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and Quality Level  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Composition of the Operating Manual  
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.  
1
2
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions of  
various parts.  
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to  
read it and follow the instructions.  
3
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.  
4
Explains the shooting-related functions.  
5
Explains how to use the built-in flash and the external flash.  
6
Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file format.  
7
Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting pictures.  
8
Explains the procedures for changing the image size, using image filters and  
processing pictures taken in RAW format.  
9
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor  
settings and the image file naming convention.  
10  
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various  
resources.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12  
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.  
Shows reference page number explaining a related operation.  
1
Shows useful information.  
Shows precautions to take when operating the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Before Using Your  
Camera  
Check the package contents and names and functions of  
working parts before use.  
Q Characteristics ..........................................14  
Display Indicators ................................................22  
Using the Mode Dial .............................................39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
14  
Q Characteristics  
• Features a 23.4×15.6 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 14.6 million  
effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.  
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake  
reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures with  
minimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.  
1
• Features an AF sensor with 11 focusing points. The central 9 focusing  
points are wide cross area sensors.  
• Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera,  
with a magnification of approximately 0.9 and field of view of  
approximately 100%, for easier manual focusing. Also features a  
superimpose function in which the AF points on the viewfinder illuminate  
red.  
• Features a large 3.0-inch monitor with approximately 921,000 dots, a  
wide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions for  
high-precision viewing performance.  
• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject in  
real-time on the monitor.  
• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the camera lens  
properties. The camera can also output composite and HDMI video so  
that you can watch recorded images and movies on a TV or high-quality  
monitor.  
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of the  
camera. The large text, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use menus  
make the camera easier to operate.  
• The body exterior is magnesium alloy, and the dials, buttons, joints, and  
retractable parts of the camera are dust-proof and water-resistant.  
• Features Dust Removal function to shake the CMOS sensor and  
remove the collected dust.  
• Features Hyper-program and Hyper-manual modes that let you take  
pictures with the intended exposure. Also features Sensitivity Priority  
mode Kthat automatically adjusts aperture and shutter speed  
according to the set sensitivity, and Shutter & Aperture Priority mode  
Lthat automatically adjusts sensitivity according to the set aperture  
and shutter speed.  
• Features Digital Filter to internally process the image in the camera. You  
can use digital filters such as Star Burst or Soft while taking pictures or  
to process images after taking pictures.  
• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while  
previewing the edited image, enabling a wider range of expression.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
15  
• Records in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully  
editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record in  
both formats. Pictures taken in RAW format can be easily processed  
internally by the camera.  
• Features Custom Image and White Balance which allow you to readjust  
images shot in JPEG format without affecting the image quality.  
• Supports the optional Battery Grip D-BG4 with vertical shutter release  
button. If a battery (D-LI90) is inserted in both the camera and grip, the  
battery with more power is prioritized. This enables you to get the best  
camera performance for an extended period. A menu item also allows  
you to prioritize a battery and use its full power before switching to the  
other battery.  
1
The captured area (view angle) will differ between the Q and 35 mm SLR  
cameras even if the same lens is used because the format size for 35 mm film  
and CMOS sensor are different.  
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor  
35 mm film  
: 36×24 mm  
Q CMOS sensor : 23.4×15.6 mm  
Angles of view being equal, the focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera  
must be approximately 1.5 times longer than that of Q. To obtain an angle  
of view framing the same area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.  
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm  
camera  
150÷1.5=100  
Use a 100 mm lens with the Q.  
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with the Q by 1.5 to  
determine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.  
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with the Q  
300×1.5=450  
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.  
Shake Reduction (SR)  
Shake Reduction (SR) on the Q features a PENTAX original system  
which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high speeds,  
compensating camera shake.  
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken, such  
as when changing the composition of a picture. It is not a malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Checking the Contents of the  
Package  
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.  
Check that all accessories are included.  
1
Hot shoe cover FK  
Eyecup FR  
ME viewfinder cap  
(Installed on camera)  
(Installed on camera)  
Sync socket 2P cap  
(Installed on camera)  
Body mount cover  
(Installed on camera)  
Triangular ring and  
protective cover  
(Installed on camera)  
USB cable  
I-USB7  
AV cable  
I-AVC7  
Strap  
O-ST53  
Rechargeable lithium-ion  
battery D-LI90  
Battery charger  
D-BC90  
AC plug cord  
Software (CD-ROM)  
S-SW90  
Operating Manual  
(this manual)  
Quick Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
17  
Names and Functions of Working  
Parts  
Built-in flash  
Strap lug  
Hot shoe  
Strap lug  
1
AF assist light  
X-sync socket  
Mirror  
Card cover  
Self-timer lamp/  
Remote control  
receiver  
AF coupler  
Lens mount index  
Lens unlock button  
Lens information  
contacts  
Diopter adjustment  
lever  
Speaker  
LCD panel  
Microphone  
Viewfinder  
Film plane indicator  
(CMOS sensor  
plane indicator)  
Microphone terminal  
mini HDMI terminal  
PC/AV terminal  
Self-timer lamp/  
Remote control  
receiver  
DC input terminal  
Terminal cover  
Monitor  
Cable release  
terminal  
Card access lamp  
Battery cover  
unlock knob  
Tripod socket  
Battery grip contacts  
Battery cover  
* In the first illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK  
removed.  
* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK and  
the Eyecup FR removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
18  
Capture Mode  
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.  
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
1
0
a
b
6
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
c
d
1
2
m button  
4 Main switch  
Turn the rear e-dial while  
pressing this button to set the  
EV compensation value.  
Move to turn the power on/off  
(p.56) or to preview (p.129).  
5 Front e-dial (R)  
Changes the settings.  
o button  
6 Lens unlock button  
Turn the rear e-dial while  
pressing this button to set the  
ISO sensitivity. (p.90)  
Press to detach lens. (p.53)  
7 Ebutton  
3 Shutter release button  
Press to pop up the built-in  
Press to capture images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
19  
8 Mode dial lock button  
e Rear e-dial (S)  
Press to allow the mode dial to  
Changes the settings.  
f
L button  
Records the exposure before  
preview image.  
9 Mode dial  
Switches the exposure  
1
0 Metering mode  
g
| (Green) button  
switching lever  
Changes the metering  
method. (p.113)  
Sets the exposure mode to  
Automatic Exposure and  
resets the settings.  
h AF point switching dial  
a
| button  
Temporarily changes the file  
format. Saves JPEG and  
RAW file by default. (p.189)  
i
= button  
Sets focusing area and  
temporarily provides manual  
focus. (p.120)  
b Focus mode lever  
Switches between autofocus  
modes (  
and manual focus mode  
(p.126).  
l/k) (p.118)  
j
k
U button  
Displays the Live View.  
c
d
Q button  
Switches to the Playback  
mode. (p.78)  
4 button  
When the control panel or a  
menu screen is displayed,  
press this button to confirm  
the selected item. When the  
AF point switching dial is set to  
j (Select), press the button  
to change the AF point.  
M button  
Turns the status screen  
display on the monitor on/off.  
Displays the control panel  
when the status screen is  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
20  
l Four-way controller  
m
3 button  
(2345)  
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]  
menu (p.83). Next, press the  
four-way controller (5) to  
display other menus.  
Opens the [Drive Mode],  
[Flash Mode], [White Balance]  
or [Custom Image] setting  
control panel or a menu  
screen is displayed, use this to  
move the cursor or change  
items. When the AF point  
switching dial is set to j  
(Select), use this to move the  
1
Playback Mode  
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during playback are noted.  
1
2
3
4
8
5
6
9
0
a
7
b
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
21  
1
m button  
8 Rear e-dial (S)  
Press in the enlarged view to  
increase the magnification.  
Use this to change the  
magnification in the enlarged  
view (p.214) and display  
multiple images at the same  
2 Shutter release button  
1
Press halfway to switch to  
Capture mode.  
9
0
| (Green) button  
Press in the enlarged view to  
decrease the magnification.  
3 Main switch  
Move to turn the power on/off.  
(p.56) Set to the | position to  
switch to Capture mode and  
preview.  
4 button  
Saves the item you selected in  
the menu.  
4 Front e-dial (R)  
a Four-way controller  
Displays the next or previous  
image.  
(2345)  
Press 3 to display the  
playback mode palette  
is displayed, use this to move  
the cursor or change items.  
5
6
i button  
Press to delete images. (p.79)  
Q button  
Press to switch to Capture  
mode.  
b
3 button  
Press to display the  
7
M button  
Press to display the shooting  
information on the monitor.  
[Q Playback 1] menu  
(p.213). Next, press the four-  
way controller (5) to display  
other menus.  
References to Button Names  
In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the four-  
way controller are referred to in the following way.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
22  
Display Indicators  
Monitor  
1
The following indicators appear  
on the monitor depending on  
the status of the camera.  
Monitor  
The brightness or the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.264)  
At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial  
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when the  
camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.  
Select [Off] for [Guide Display] in the [RSet-up 1] menu to not show indicators.  
(p.262)  
Program  
Automatic Exposure  
P
1
RAW RAW  
P
Tv  
Av  
2
AF Cancel AF  
05/05/2009  
10:30AM  
3
4
1
2
Exposure Mode (p.93)  
Operation guide  
3
4
World Time (p.258)  
Date and Time (p.61)  
* 3 appears only when [World Time] is set to [Destination].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
23  
Capture Mode  
While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current  
shooting function settings.  
 Status screen  
1
(All of the indications are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The Actual  
display may differ.)  
USER  
1
2
9
3
4
5
6
7
AF.S  
P
SHIFT  
1/2000 F2.8  
10  
8
8
8
22  
+1.0  
G1A1  
ISO  
11  
12  
14  
AUTO  
1600  
23  
24  
25  
13  
8
-
5 4 3 2 1  
1 2  
3
4 +5  
AWB  
15  
19  
16  
20  
17  
21  
18  
JPEG  
[
]
14M  
1234  
1
2
3
Exposure Mode (p.93)  
AE Lock (p.116)  
Interval Shooting (p.144)/Multi-  
exposure (p.146)/Extended  
Bracketing (p.151)/Digital Filter  
(p.153)/HDR Capture (p.200)  
13 EV Compensation (p.115)/  
Exposure Bracketing (p.148)  
14 EV bar  
15 Flash Mode (p.72)  
16 Drive Mode (p.82)  
17 White Balance (p.191)  
4
Shake Reduction (p.132)/Horizon 18 Custom Image (p.205)  
Correction (p.133)  
19 File Format (p.188)  
5
6
7
8
9
Focus Mode (p.118)  
Metering Method (p.113)  
Battery level (p.46)  
E-dial guide  
20 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.186)  
21 JPEG Quality (p.187)  
22 Flash Exposure Compensation  
Shutter speed  
23 Adjust White Balance (p.193)  
24 AF point (p.122)  
10 Aperture  
11 ISO/ISO AUTO  
12 Sensitivity (p.90)  
25 Remaining image storage capacity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
24  
 Control panel  
Press the M button in the status screen to display the control panel and change  
settings.  
1
ISO AUTO Setting  
1
ISO  
2
4
200-1600  
AUTO  
DR  
200  
3
7
5
9
6
HDR  
OFF  
WB  
OFF  
8
10  
14  
11  
12  
15  
13  
JPEG  
14M  
05/05/ ’09 10:30AM  
[
]
37  
16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Function name  
Sensitivity  
Program Line  
Highlight Correction  
Shadow Correction  
Distortion Correction  
Extended Bracketing  
Digital Filter  
10 Lateral Chromatic Aberration  
Correction  
11 File Format  
12 JPEG Recorded Pixels  
13 JPEG Quality  
14 Shake Reduction  
15 Date and Time  
16 Remaining image storage capacity  
HDR Capture  
• Items that cannot be changed due to the current camera setting status  
cannot be selected.  
• The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds  
after pressing the M button.  
• When [Status Screen] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu is set to [Off], the status  
screen is not displayed. The control panel turns on and off each time the  
M button is pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
25  
Playback Mode  
The camera switches display information when you press the M  
button during playback.  
Standard  
Captured image and indicators are displayed.  
1
Images and histogram (Brightness/RGB) are  
displayed.  
Histogram display  
Detailed showing of how and when the images  
were taken is displayed.  
Detailed information display  
No info. display  
Only captured images are displayed.  
M
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
Standard  
Histogram display  
M
M
P
0
M
AF.S  
0
0
0
0
0
0
800mm  
DR  
200  
WB  
1/  
2000  
F5.6  
+1.0  
+1.0  
ISO 200 10000K G2 A1  
JPEG 14M  
AdobeRGB  
05/05/ ’09 10:00AM 100-0001  
No info. display  
Detailed information display  
The information that is shown first during playback is the same as that of the  
last playback in the previous session. The [Standard] screen is displayed every  
time the camera is turned on by setting [Playback Display] to P (Off) in  
[Memory] (p.281) in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
26  
 Detailed information display  
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages.  
Page 1  
2
3
26  
27  
P
1
5
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
AF.S  
4
800mm  
DR  
200  
6
7
WB  
1/  
2000  
9
10 11 12 13 14  
F5.6  
+1.0  
+1.0  
15  
16  
20  
17 18  
21  
ISO 200 10000K G2 A1  
19  
JPEG 14M  
AdobeRGB  
22 23 24  
28  
25  
10:00AM 100-0001  
05/05/ ’09  
29  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Captured image  
Protect setting  
Exposure Mode  
Focus Mode  
AF point  
Flash Mode  
Metering Method  
Lens focal length  
Shutter speed  
15 Aperture  
16 EV Compensation  
17 Flash Exposure Compensation  
18 Digital Filter  
19 Sensitivity  
20 White Balance  
21 Adjust White Balance  
22 File Format  
23 JPEG Recorded Pixels  
24 JPEG Quality  
10 Shake Reduction/Horizon  
Correction  
25 Color Space  
11 Drive Mode  
26 Image Tone  
12 Extended Bracketing/  
27 Custom Image parameters  
28 Shooting date/time  
29 Folder number-File number  
HDR Capture/Multi-exposure  
13 Highlight Correction  
14 Shadow Correction  
* Indicators 6 and 17 appear only for images in which the flash was discharged.  
* Indicators 12, 13, 14, 18, and 21 appear only for images taken with the  
corresponding functions enabled.  
* Indicators 23 and 24 do not appear for RAW images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
Page 2  
30  
30  
31  
32  
Photographer  
A BC D E F G H I JK L MN OP  
Q R S T U V WX Y Z  
31  
32  
Copyright Holder  
1
A BC D E F G H I JK L MN OP  
Q R S T U V WX Y Z  
30 Information tampering warning  
32 Copyright Holder (p.277)  
31 Photographer (p.277)  
 Movie  
4
Movie 10min00sec  
100-0001  
1
2
3
1
2
File Format  
Playback time  
3
4
Folder number-File number/  
Volume  
Four-way controller guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
 Histogram Display  
The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still  
pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness  
and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Use the  
four-way controller (23) to switch between Brightness histogram and  
RGB histogram.  
1
1
23  
23  
8
9
11  
1
10  
7
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
6
5
4
3
2
6
5
4
3
2
Brightness histogram  
RGB histogram  
1
Histogram (Brightness)  
Folder number-File number  
Protect setting  
Aperture  
Shutter speed  
7
8
9
Color Space  
Histogram (R)  
Histogram (G)  
2
3
4
5
6
10 Histogram (B)  
11 Switch Brightness histogram/  
RGB histogram  
File Format  
* Indicator 3 appears only for images with Protect setting.  
Areas affected by bright or dark portions blink if [Bright/Dark Area] warning is  
set to O (On) in [Playback Display Method] in the [Q Playback 1] menu.  
(p.215)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
29  
Using the Histogram  
A histogram shows the brightness  
distribution of an image. The  
horizontal axis represents brightness  
(dark at the left and bright at the right)  
and the vertical axis represents the  
number of pixels.  
1
(Dark) Brightness(Bright)  
Dark portions Bright portions  
The shape and the distribution of the  
histogram before and after shooting tells you whether the exposure level  
and contrast are correct or not, and lets you decide if you need to use EV  
compensation and take a picture again.  
Understanding Brightness  
When the brightness is correct and there are no overly light or dark areas,  
the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak is on the  
left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.  
Dark image  
Image with few bright  
or dark areas  
Bright image  
When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions with  
no detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off  
(bright portions with no detail).  
Bright portions blink red on the monitor and dark portions blink yellow  
when [Bright/Dark area] is O (On).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
Understanding Color Balance  
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB  
histogram. The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have  
white balance adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that  
color is too intense.  
1
Operation guide  
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,  
buttons and e-dials that can be operated at that time.  
Example:  
2
3
Four-way controller (2)  
Four-way controller (3)  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Front e-dial  
3 button  
4 button  
4
|
Green button  
L button  
i button  
5
R
S
Rear e-dial  
Shutter release button  
When holding the camera vertically  
If the camera is held vertically while measuring the  
brightness, the control panel/status screen is  
displayed vertically. The directions of the four-way  
controller (2345) also change to match the  
orientation of the camera.  
ISO AUTO Setting  
ISO  
200-1600  
AUTO  
DR  
200  
HDR  
OFF  
WB  
JPEG  
14M  
05/05/ ’09  
[
]
10:30AM  
1234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
31  
Viewfinder  
The following information appears in the viewfinder.  
2
3
1
1
1
4 5  
6
7
8
9
10  
11 12  
13  
14 15 16 17 18 19  
1
2
3
4
Spot metering frame (p.114)  
AF point (p.122)  
Flash status (p.72)  
Appears when flash is available.  
Blinks when flash is recommended but not set or is being charged.  
5
6
Manual focus (p.126)  
Appears when the focus mode is set to \.  
Shutter speed  
Shutter speed when capturing or adjusting (underlined when shutter speed  
can be adjusted).  
7
8
9
Aperture  
Aperture when capturing or adjusting (underlined when aperture can be  
adjusted).  
Focus indicator (p.67)  
Appears continuously when image is focused.  
Blinks when the subject is not in focus.  
Shows the EV compensation values or difference between the appropriate  
and current exposure values when the exposure mode is set to a.  
Displays the camera angle when [Electronic Level] is O (On).  
10 ISO/ISO AUTO  
Appears when the sensitivity is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
32  
11 Sensitivity  
Shows the number of recordable images immediately after shooting.  
12 AE Lock (p.116)  
Appears during AE lock.  
13 Move AF point (p.123)  
Appears when the AF point is being moved with the AF point switching dial  
set to j (Select).  
1
14 Multi-exposure (p.146)  
Appears when Multi-exposure is set.  
15 Metering Method (p.113)  
16 Shake Reduction (p.132)  
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.  
17 Flash Exposure Compensation (p.76)  
Appears when the flash exposure compensation is in use.  
18 EV Compensation (p.115)/Exposure Bracketing (p.148)  
Appears when EV compensation is available or in use.  
Appears when set to [Exposure Bracketing].  
19 File Format (p.188)  
Displays the image save format in RAW/RAW+ format.  
Not displayed in JPEG format.  
• The AF point in use for autofocus appears in red (superimposed) when the  
shutter release button is pressed halfway. (p.122)  
• When [13. AF Button Function] is set to [Cancel AF] in the [A Custom Setting  
2] menu, press the = button to display \ in the viewfinder. (p.120)  
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed  
in the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more,  
[9999] is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
33  
LCD Panel  
The following information appears in the LCD panel on top of the camera.  
1
3 4  
5
1
2
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1
2
3
4
5
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Multi-exposure (p.146)  
Mirror Lock-up shooting (p.141)  
EV bar (p.115)/Electronic Level  
>
: Red-eye reduction function  
is activated  
3
: Auto Flash Discharge  
Q : Slow-speed Sync  
E
: Trailing Curtain Sync  
: Wireless  
w
6
EV Compensation (p.115)/  
Exposure Bracketing (p.148)  
12 Drive Mode (p.82)  
9
: Single Frame Shooting  
7
8
Battery level (p.46)  
Flash Exposure Compensation  
j
g
W
: Continuous Shooting  
: Self-Timer shooting  
: Remote Control shooting  
9
Sensitivity/EV compensation value 13 File Format (p.188)  
10 ISO/ISO AUTO  
Appears when sensitivity is  
displayed.  
1 : RAW capture  
1P: RAW+JPEG capture  
14 Remaining image storage capacity/  
USB connection mode (p.275)  
11 Flash Mode (p.72)  
b
: Built-in flash is ready  
Pc-S : MSC mode  
(when blinking, flash  
should be used)  
Pc-P : PTP mode  
LCD panel is illuminated when the exposure metering is performed. You can  
set it to not illuminate in [29. LCD Panel Illumination] in the [A Custom  
Setting 5] menu (p.87).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
34  
How to Change Function Settings  
Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, the control panel or  
the menu. Some functions can be changed using both the control panel and  
menu.  
1
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.  
Using the Direct Keys  
By pressing the four-way controller (2345) in Capture mode you can  
set [Drive Mode], [Flash Mode], [White Balance] and [Custom Image].  
(p.82)  
Below, how to set to the flash mode will be explained as an example.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3)  
in Capture mode.  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a flash mode.  
Flash Mode  
Flash On  
0.0  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
35  
Using the Control Panel  
While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.  
You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.  
Following, how to set the JPEG quality will be explained as an example.  
1
1
Check the status screen and then  
press the M button.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button if the status  
screen is not displayed.  
OFF  
AF.S  
P SHIFT  
1/2000  
AUTO 1600  
F
2.8  
0.0  
0 0  
ISO  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
AWB  
[
]
JPEG 14M  
37  
37  
37  
2
3
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select an item you  
want to change the setting for.  
ISO AUTO Setting  
ISO  
200-1600  
AUTO  
DR  
200  
You cannot select an item that cannot be  
changed.  
HDR  
OFF  
WB  
OFF  
JPEG  
14M  
05/05/ ’09 10:30AM  
[
]
Use the front e-dial (R) or rear  
e-dial (S) to change the  
setting.  
JPEG Quality  
ISO  
200-1600  
-
AUTO  
D R  
200  
HDR  
OFF  
WB  
OFF  
JPEG  
14M  
05/05/ ’09 10:30AM  
[
]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
36  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to the status screen  
and is ready to take a picture.  
1
• Press the 4 button in Step 3 on p.35 to display the setting screen for the  
selected item. Use the setting screen to set the settings for [Extended  
Bracketing], [Digital Filter] and other items.  
• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View  
(p.156) is displayed. Make the settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
Using the Menus  
This section explains operation methods for the [A Rec. Mode],  
[Q Playback], [RSet-up] and [A Custom Setting] menus.  
Following, how to set [Program Line] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu will be  
explained as an example.  
1
Press the 3 button in  
Capture mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on  
the monitor.  
If the  
mode, the [  
3
button is pressed in Playback  
Playback 1] menu appears.  
Q
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
37  
2
Press the four-way controller (5)  
or turn the rear e-dial (S) to the  
right (toward y).  
1
2
3
4
File Format  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
JPEG  
14M  
Each time the four-way controller (5) is  
pressed, the menu will change in the  
following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],  
[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],  
[Q Playback 1] ··· [A Rec. Mode 1].  
ISO AUTO Setting  
D-Range Setting  
Lens Correction  
1
MENU  
Exit  
When the front e-dial (R) is turned to  
the right, the menu will change in the following sequence:  
[A Rec. Mode 1], [Q Playback 1], [RSet-up 1], [A Custom Setting 1].  
3
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose an item.  
1
2
4
3
Program Line  
Extended Bracketing  
HDR Capture  
OFF  
Off  
OFF  
Digital Filter  
Multi-exposure  
Interval Shooting  
Composition Adjust.  
MENU  
Exit  
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
1
2
4
3
Program Line  
Extended Bracketing  
HDR Capture  
OFF  
Available settings are displayed.  
Use the pop-up menu if there is one.  
Off  
OFF  
Digital Filter  
Multi-exposure  
Interval Shooting  
Composition Adjust.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a setting.  
1
2
4
3
Program Line  
Extended Bracketing  
HDR Capture  
Digital Filter  
Multi-exposure  
Interval Shooting  
Composition Adjust.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the menu screen.  
Next, set other items.  
Press the 3 button to exit the menu  
and the screen that was displayed before  
selecting the menu appears again.  
1
Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, your  
settings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as by  
removing the battery while the camera is on).  
Refer to the following pages for details on each menu item.  
• [A Rec. Mode] menu 1 p.83  
• [Q Playback] menu 1 p.213  
• [R Set-up] menu 1 p.254  
• [A Custom Setting] menu 1 p.85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
Using the Mode Dial  
You can switch the exposure modes by setting the icons on the mode dial  
to the dial indicator.  
Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock button.  
1
Mode dial  
Dial indicator  
Mode dial lock button  
Mode  
A(USER)  
(Green)  
Characteristics  
Page  
Lets you capture images with the saved  
Capture mode.  
Lets you capture images with fully automatic  
settings.  
B
Automatically sets the shutter speed and  
aperture to the proper exposure according to  
e (Hyper-program)  
Program Line when taking pictures. You can p.96  
use the front and rear e-dials to switch to  
shutter priority or aperture priority.  
Automatically sets the shutter speed and  
aperture to the proper exposure according to p.98  
the set sensitivity.  
K(Sensitivity Priority)  
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for  
b
(Shutter Priority)  
expressing moving subjects.  
Lets you set the aperture for controlling the  
depth of field.  
c (Aperture Priority)  
Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the  
L(Shutter & Aperture manually set shutter speed and aperture will  
Priority)  
give the proper exposure according to the  
brightness of the subject.  
Lets you set shutter speed and aperture to  
capture the picture with creative intent.  
a (Hyper-manual)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
40  
Mode  
Characteristics  
Page  
Lets you capture images that require slow  
shutter speeds such as fireworks and night  
scenes.  
p (Bulb)  
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180  
seconds. Use this when using an external  
flash that does not automatically change the  
shutter speed.  
1
M(Flash X-sync Speed)  
C (Movie)  
Use this to record movies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Getting Started  
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the  
camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the  
instructions.  
Attaching the Strap ..............................................42  
Using the Battery ..................................................43  
Attaching the Lens ...............................................53  
Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................56  
Initial Settings .......................................................57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
42  
Attaching the Strap  
1
Pass the end of the strap through  
the protective cover and  
triangular ring.  
2
2
Secure the end of the strap on the inside of the clasp.  
3
Attach the other end of the strap in the same manner as  
described above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
43  
Using the Battery  
Insert the battery into the camera. Use only a D-LI90 battery.  
Charging the Battery  
2
When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not been  
used in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge the  
battery.  
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible  
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”  
Indicator lamp  
Lithium-ion battery  
AC plug cord  
Battery charger  
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.  
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.  
2
3
Face the 2 mark on the exclusive battery up and insert it  
into the battery charger.  
The indicator lamp is lit during charging.  
The indicator lamp turns off when the battery is fully charged.  
4
When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from  
the battery charger.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
44  
Do not use the provided battery charger to charge batteries other than  
rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90. Charging other batteries may cause  
damage or heating.  
• If the battery is correctly oriented and inserted into the battery charger but the  
indicator lamp is not lit, the battery is faulty. Install a new battery in the  
camera.  
• The maximum charging time is approximately 390 minutes. Charge in a  
location where the temperature is between 0°C and 40°C. (Charge time  
depends on temperature and remaining battery power.)  
2
• If usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery has  
reached the end of its usage span. Install a new battery in the camera.  
Inserting/Removing the Battery  
When using the battery for the first time, charge the battery and insert it into  
the camera.  
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.  
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The  
battery may leak.  
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you insert a new battery  
after a long time, follow the procedure for [Setting the Date and Time]. (p.61)  
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may cause  
camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth  
before inserting.  
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is  
used continuously for a long period of time.  
1
Open the battery cover.  
2
1
Lift the battery cover unlock knob, turn  
towards OPEN (1) to unlock, and then  
pull the cover open (2).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
45  
2
3
Face the 2 mark on the battery towards the outside of the  
camera, push the battery lock lever in the direction of the  
arrow (3) and insert the battery.  
Insert until the battery locks.  
To remove the battery, push the  
battery lock lever in the direction  
of the arrow (3) with your hand.  
3
Remove the battery when it pops  
2
out slightly.  
Battery lock lever  
Close the battery cover (4) and  
4
turn the battery cover unlock  
5
knob towards CLOSE (5) to  
lock.  
Stow the battery cover unlock knob after  
closing the battery cover.  
Use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using the camera for a  
prolonged period. (p.47)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
Battery Level Indicator  
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w/A  
displayed on the status screen and LCD panel.  
Status screen  
w (Green)  
x (Green)  
y (Yellow)  
z (Red)  
LCD panel  
Battery level  
A
Battery is full.  
2
B
Battery is close to full.  
Battery is running low.  
Battery is almost empty.  
C
D lit  
The camera turns off after displaying the  
message. (D continues blinking on the  
LCD panel.)  
“Battery depleted”  
D blinks  
y, z (red), C or D may appear even when the battery level is  
sufficient if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing  
continuous shooting consecutively. In this sort of case, turn the camera off  
and on again. If w or A appears, you can use the camera.  
w and A are not displayed when using the AC adapter.  
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and  
Playback Time (Battery Fully Charged)  
Flash photography  
Normal  
recording  
Battery  
D-LI90  
Playback time  
(Temperature)  
(23°C)  
50% use  
740  
100% use  
610  
980  
810  
440 minutes  
400 minutes  
( 0°C)  
680  
560  
The picture storage capacity (flash use 50%) is based on measuring conditions in  
accordance with CIPA standards and the others are based on our measuring  
conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use  
depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
47  
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.  
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries on hand and  
keep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normal  
when returned to room temperature.  
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold  
climates, or when you will be taking a lot of pictures.  
• If usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery has  
reached the end of its usage span. Install a new battery in the camera.  
2
Using the AC Adapter (Optional)  
We recommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using  
the monitor for a long time or when connecting to your PC or AV device.  
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.  
Open the terminal cover.  
2
3
Face the 2 mark on the DC  
terminal of the AC adapter  
towards the 2 mark on the  
camera, and connect the DC  
terminal to the DC input terminal  
of the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
48  
4
5
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.  
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.  
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the  
AC adapter.  
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Card  
and data will be corrupted if disconnected while the camera is recording or  
reading data.  
2
• Be sure to read the AC adapter kit K-AC50 Operating Manual when using the  
AC adapter.  
• The battery in your camera will not charge when connected to the AC  
adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
Inserting/Removing the SD Memory  
Card  
This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card.  
(Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards hereafter.) Make sure the  
camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card  
(commercially available).  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.  
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or  
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting the  
SD Memory Card” (p.256) for details on formatting.  
2
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If the write speed  
cannot keep up with the recording speed, the writing may stop during  
recording.  
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.  
2
Slide the card cover in the  
direction of the arrow (1) and  
then lift it to open (2).  
1
2
3
Insert the card all the way with  
the SD Memory Card label toward  
the monitor.  
Push the SD Memory Card in once to  
remove.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
50  
4
Close the card cover (3) and  
then slide it in the direction of the  
arrow (4).  
4
3
2
Be sure to fully close the card cover. The camera will not turn on if the card  
cover is open.  
Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card  
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a  
write-protect switch. Setting the switch to  
LOCK prevents new data from being  
recorded on the card, the stored data from  
being deleted, and the card from being  
formatted by the camera or computer.  
• Care should be taken when removing the  
Write-protect  
switch  
SD Memory Card immediately after using the camera because the card may  
be hot.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn the camera off while images are  
being played back or saved to the card, or the camera is connected to a  
computer with the USB cable. This may cause the data to be lost or the card  
to be damaged.  
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away  
from water and store away from high temperatures.  
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be  
damaged and become unusable.  
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.  
We do not accept any liability for data that are deleted if  
(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.  
(2) the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical  
interference.  
(3) the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.  
(4) the SD Memory Card is ejected or the battery is removed while the data on  
the card are being recorded or accessed.  
• If it is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become unreadable.  
Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.  
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or  
electrical interference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
51  
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or where it may be exposed to  
rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.  
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards used with other  
cameras.  
• Please note that formatting the SD Memory Card will not necessarily delete the  
data so that they cannot be recovered using off the shelf data recovery  
software. If you are going to discard, give away or sell your SD Memory Card  
you should ensure that the data on the card are completely deleted or the card  
itself is destroyed if it contains any personal or sensitive information. There are  
off the shelf secure data deletion software programs available that will  
completely delete the data.  
2
In any case the data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own  
risk.  
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level  
When the File Format is JPEG  
Choose the number of pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG data  
compression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use the  
pictures you have taken.  
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more Es are clearer when printed.  
The number of pictures that can be taken (the number of pictures that can  
be recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases with larger file sizes.  
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality  
level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of other  
factors so you do not need to select more than the required number of  
pixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1728×1152) is  
adequate. Set the appropriate recorded size and quality level depending  
on purpose.  
Choose the appropriate number of recorded pixels and quality level for  
JPEG images in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu or on the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
52  
 JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image  
Storage Capacity  
(When using a 1 GB SD Memory Card)  
JPEG Quality  
Z
C
D
E
Premium  
Best  
Better  
Good  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
W
J
P
i
(4672×3104)  
73  
117  
163  
267  
805  
206  
289  
408  
564  
(3936×2624)  
(3072×2048)  
(1728×1152)  
102  
167  
516  
468  
902  
2
1373  
2518  
• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting  
conditions, shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.  
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are  
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracket, images will  
be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the number of  
images exceeds 500.  
When the File Format is RAW  
With the Q, you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the high  
quality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select the  
PENTAX original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative)  
format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 1 GB SD Memory Card, you can  
record up to 40 images in PEF format or DNG format.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
Attaching the Lens  
Attach a proper lens to the camera’s body.  
When you use one of the following lenses with the Q, all the camera’s  
exposure modes will be available.  
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses  
(b) Lenses with an Aperture s (Auto) position, when used in the  
s position  
2
Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent  
unexpected lens movement.  
• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s, some  
functions will be restricted. See “Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.294).  
• With factory default settings, the camera will not work with other lenses and  
accessories. Set [37. Using Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6] menu  
to [Permitted] to use them. (p.294)  
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.  
2
Remove the body mount cover  
(1) and lens mount cover (2).  
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens  
mount side facing upward to protect the  
lens mount from damage after removal.  
3
Align the Lens mount index (red  
dots; 3) on the camera and the  
lens, and secure by turning the  
lens clockwise until it clicks.  
After attaching, turn the lens  
counterclockwise to check that the lens is  
locked in place.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
54  
4
Remove the front lens cap by  
pushing the indicated portions  
inward.  
2
To detach the lens, hold down the lens  
unlock button (4) and turn the lens  
counterclockwise.  
4
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and  
malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.  
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts and  
an AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.  
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.  
The body mount cover (1) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust when  
shipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function. (p.304)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
55  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter  
Adjust the viewfinder to suit your eyesight.  
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter  
adjustment lever sideways.  
You can adjust the diopter from approximately -2.5 to +1.5 m-1.  
2
1
Look through the viewfinder and  
slide the diopter adjustment lever  
left or right.  
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the  
viewfinder appears sharply focused.  
Point the camera at a white wall or other  
bright and consistent surface.  
AF frame  
• The Eyecup FR is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves  
the factory. Diopter adjustment is available with the Eyecup FR attached.  
However, adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.  
• To remove the Eyecup FR, press in one  
side and pull it out in the direction of the  
arrow.  
To attach the Eyecup FR, align it with the  
groove on the viewfinder eyepiece and  
push it into position.  
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image  
clearly even if you set the diopter  
adjustment lever, use an optional diopter  
correction lens adapter M. However, the  
Eyecup FR must be removed to use this  
adapter. (p.302)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
56  
Turning the Camera On and Off  
1
Turn the main switch to [ON].  
The camera will turn on.  
Set the main switch to the position [OFF]  
to turn off the camera.  
2
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.  
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations  
within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera after it turns off  
automatically, turn it on again or perform any of the following.  
- The shutter release button is pressed halfway  
- The Q button is pressed  
- The M button is pressed  
• By default, the camera is set to power off automatically after 1 minute of  
inactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] in the [RSet-up 3]  
menu. (p.270)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
57  
Initial Settings  
The first time the camera is turned on after  
purchasing, the [Language/  
] screen  
appears on the monitor. Follow the  
procedure below to set the language  
displayed on the monitor and the current  
date and time. Once setting is done, these  
will not need to be set again when turning  
your camera on.  
2
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set  
the date and time by following the procedure  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
Setting the Display Language  
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.  
are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,  
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Chinese (traditional/  
simplified) and Japanese.  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the desired  
language.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
58  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The [Initial Setting] screen for the  
selected language appears.  
Initial Setting  
English  
Press the four-way controller (3) twice and  
proceed to Step 10 on p.59 if [Hometown]  
does not have to be changed.  
New York  
Text Size  
Standard  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
2
MENU  
3
4
5
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to W.  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [W Hometown] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a city.  
Hometown  
New York  
DST  
10:00  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
6
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).  
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.  
9
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to [Text Size].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
59  
10 Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Standard] or  
[Large].  
Initial Setting  
English  
New York  
Text Size  
Standard  
Large  
Selecting [Large] magnifies the selected  
menu item.  
Settings complete  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
2
11 Press the 4 button.  
12 Use the four-way controller (3)  
Initial Setting  
to select [Settings complete].  
English  
New York  
Text Size  
Standard  
Settings complete  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
13 Press the 4 button.  
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.  
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set  
to [Standard].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
60  
When an Incorrect Language is Set  
When you mistakenly select a language in the [Language/  
] screen  
and proceed to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can perform the  
following operations to set the correct language.  
If you have proceeded to switch the camera to Capture mode (and the  
camera is ready to take a picture), perform the following operations from  
Step 2 to set the correct language.  
2
1
Press the 3 button once to  
display the guides on the  
monitor.  
P
The screen shown on the right is an  
example of the guides displayed. The  
displayed screen will vary depending on  
the selected language.  
RAW RAW  
AF  
P
Tv  
Av  
2009/05/05  
10:30AM  
The guides appear on the monitor for 3  
seconds.  
2
3
4
5
6
Press the 3 button once.  
[A 1] is displayed in the upper tab.  
Press the four-way controller (5) five times.  
[R1] is displayed in the upper tab.  
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [Language/  
].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Language/  
] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select a desired  
language and press the 4 button.  
The [RSet-up 1] menu in the selected language appears.  
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown]  
and the current date and time as necessary.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting]  
screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed when the camera is  
turned on again.  
• If you have not proceeded to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can reselect  
a language using the four-way controller (5) in the [Language/  
] screen.  
Setting the Date and Time  
2
Set the current date and time and the display style.  
1
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose the date format.  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/  
mm/dd].  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to [24h].  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select 24h (24-hour  
display) or 12h (12-hour display).  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Date Format].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
62  
6
7
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Date].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to the month.  
8
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the month.  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
2
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
Set the day and year in the same manner.  
Next, set the time.  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the setting  
switches between am and pm depending  
on the time.  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
9
Use the four-way controller (3)  
to select [Settings complete].  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
10 Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.  
If you set the date and time with the menu operations, the screen will  
return to the [RSet-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.  
Pressing the 3 button while adjusting the date and time cancels the  
settings made so far and switches the camera to Capture mode. If the power  
is turned on without the date and time set, the [Date Adjustment] screen is  
displayed if the initial settings have been completed. You can also set the date  
and time later by menu operations. (p.258)  
• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the camera clock is reset to 00  
seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal  
(on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.  
• You can change the language and the date and time settings with the menu  
operations. (p.258, p.261)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Basic Operations  
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by  
setting mode dial to Green mode (automatic exposure  
according to the program line set to j) to ensure  
successful capturing.  
For information about advanced functions and settings for  
taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.  
Basic Shooting Operation ...................................64  
Using a Zoom Lens ..............................................71  
Using the Built-in Flash .......................................72  
Playing Back Images ............................................78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
64  
Basic Shooting Operation  
Holding the Camera  
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.  
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands and keep your elbows close  
to your body.  
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.  
3
Horizontal position  
Vertical position  
• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object  
such as a table, tree, or wall.  
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the shutter  
speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length ×1.5). For example,  
it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/150 of a second for  
100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function (p.132) when using a  
lower shutter speed.  
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight of  
the camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.  
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.  
(p.132)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
65  
When the Camera is not Level  
This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether  
the camera is level. When the camera is not level, this is indicated on  
the bar graph in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. This is useful  
when holding the camera.  
3
When level (at 0°)  
When tilted 5° to the left  
When held vertically and tilted 3° to the right  
[Electronic Level] is P (Off) by default. Set in the [A Rec. Mode 3]  
menu. (p.266)  
The composition can also be adjusted in the camera when the  
camera is stabilized using a tripod. (p.203)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
66  
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal  
Settings  
The Q features various capture modes, focus modes, and drive  
modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how  
to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.  
1
Set the mode dial to B.  
Turn the mode dial while pressing the  
mode dial lock button.  
3
The exposure mode changes to B  
(Green) mode. In B, the proper  
exposure is determined by the camera  
and the shutter speed and aperture are  
automatically set.  
Mode dial lock button  
2
Set the focus mode lever to  
l.  
The focus mode changes to l  
(Autofocus/Single) mode. In l, the  
lens automatically focuses when the  
shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
When the image is focused, the shutter  
can be released. (p.118)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
67  
3
4
Look through the viewfinder to  
view the subject.  
A zoom lens can be used to change the  
size of the subject in the viewfinder.  
Position the subject inside the  
AF frame and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
3
The autofocus system operates. The  
focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
AF assist light turns on in a dark or backlit  
location, but the flash does not pop up  
automatically. If the flash is necessary,  
the flash status Eblinks in the viewfinder.  
Press the Ebutton to pop up the flash.  
Flash  
status  
Focus indicator  
5
Press the shutter release button  
fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
68  
6
Review the captured image on  
the monitor.  
The image appears for 1 second on the  
monitor shortly after capturing (Instant  
Review).  
You can magnify the image during Instant  
Review with the rear e-dial (S). (p.214)  
You can delete the image during Instant  
Review by pressing the i button. (p.79)  
3
Delete  
• For details on using B(Green) mode, see p.95.  
• You can set the camera so that pressing the = button will focus  
automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button  
halfway. (p.120)  
• You can preview the image on the monitor and check composition, exposure,  
and focus before taking pictures. (p.129)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
69  
Operating the shutter release button  
The shutter release button has two working positions.  
Not pressed Pressed halfway Pressed fully  
(first position) (second position)  
Pressing it down halfway (first position) turns on the viewfinder  
indicators and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it fully  
(second position) takes a picture.  
3
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent  
camera shake.  
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn  
where the first position and second position are.  
• The viewfinder indicators stay on while the shutter release button is  
pressed halfway. The indicators stay on for about 10 seconds (default  
setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after the button is  
released. (p.31, p.114)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
70  
Subjects that are Difficult to Focus on  
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult  
when taking pictures under the following conditions. These also apply  
to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.  
(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in the  
focusing area.  
(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusing  
area.  
(c) Fast moving objects.  
(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright  
background).  
3
(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within  
the focusing area.  
(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within the  
focusing area.  
If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus mode  
lever to \ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject  
with the aid of the matte field in the viewfinder. (p.127)  
Subject may not be focused even when ] (focus indicator) is displayed  
when (e) and (f) above apply.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
71  
Using a Zoom Lens  
Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) with  
a zoom lens. Adjust it to the desired size and take the picture.  
1
Turn the zoom ring to the right or  
left.  
Turn the zoom ring clockwise for  
telephoto and counterclockwise for wide  
angle.  
3
Wide Angle  
Telephoto  
• The smaller the number of the displayed focal length, the wider the angle.  
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.  
• Power Zoom (Auto Zoom) is available if a Power Zoom compatible FA lens  
is used with this camera. (p.292)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
72  
Using the Built-in Flash  
Use the following procedures to take pictures in low light or backlit  
conditions or when you want to manually use the built-in flash.  
The built-in flash is optimum at about 0.7 m to 5 m from the subject.  
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of the  
corners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a  
distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on the  
lens being used and set sensitivity (p.171)).  
3
Compatibility of built-in flash and lens  
Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the  
capture conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to confirm this.  
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.  
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set  
aperture lens ring to s (Auto).  
For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with the  
external flash, refer to the “Using the Flash” (p.167).  
Setting the Flash Mode  
Flash Mode  
Function  
Auto Flash  
Discharge  
Discharges the flash automatically in dark or backlit  
conditions.  
C
Auto Flash+  
Red-eye Reduction flash.  
Lights a red-eye reduction light before automatic  
D
E
Flash On  
Discharges the flash for each picture.  
Flash On+  
Lights a red-eye reduction light before discharging  
F
Red-eye Reduction the flash with Flash On.  
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the  
brightness. For example, when using this to shoot a  
portrait with the sunset in the background, both the  
person and the background are captured beautifully.  
Slow-speed Sync  
G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
73  
Flash Mode  
Function  
Slow-speed Sync+ Lights a red-eye reduction light before discharging  
H
Red-eye  
the flash with Slow-speed Sync.  
Discharges flash immediately before closing the  
shutter curtain. Capture moving images as if they are  
leaving a trail behind. (p.170)  
I
k
Trailing Curtain  
Sync  
You can synchronize a dedicated external flash  
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync  
cord. (p.176)  
Wireless Mode  
r
The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the exposure  
mode.  
3
Exposure Mode  
Selectable Flash Mode  
C/D  
Restrictions  
B
No flash compensation  
b/L/a/p  
M
E/F/k/r  
E/F/r  
e/c/K  
A
E/F/G/H/I/r  
According to the saved settings  
1
Press the four-way controller (3)  
in Capture mode.  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a flash mode.  
Flash Mode  
Flash On  
When not in B(Green) mode, turn the  
rear e-dial (S) to perform the flash  
exposure compensation. (p.76)  
0.0  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Using Built-in Flash  
3
1
Press the Ebutton.  
The built-in flash pops up and begins  
charging. When the flash is fully charged,  
Eappears in the viewfinder and on the  
LCD panel. (p.31, p.33)  
2
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when focused.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
When the mode dial is at B, the flash is not discharged if the lighting  
conditions do not require flash for correction even when the flash is  
popped up.  
The Flash On is used if the flash is popped up when the mode dial is at  
a setting other than B.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
75  
4
Push down on the portion  
indicated in the illustration to  
retract the flash.  
Using Red-eye Reduction Flash  
3
“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in  
photographs taken in dark environments with a flash. This is caused  
by the reflection of the electronic flash in the retina of the eye. Red-  
eye occurs because pupils are dilated in dark environments.  
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures can  
be used to combat it.  
• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.  
• Set to wide angle and move closer to the subject if a zoom lens  
is in use.  
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.  
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible when  
using an external flash.  
The red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces red-eye by  
discharging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction function, the  
pre-flash is discharged just before the shutter is released. This  
reduces pupil dilation. The main flash is then discharged while the  
pupils are smaller, reducing the red-eye effect.  
To use the red-eye reduction function, set Din Bmode, or For  
Hin other modes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
76  
Daylight-Sync Shooting  
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait  
picture is taken with a person’s face cast in shadow. Use of the flash  
in this way is called Daylight-Sync shooting. Flash On is used when  
shooting with Daylight-Sync shooting.  
 Taking pictures (in e mode)  
1 Pop up the flash manually and confirm that the flash mode is set  
to E.  
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.  
3 Take a picture.  
3
Without Daylight-Sync  
With Daylight-Sync  
The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.  
Compensating Flash Output  
You can change the flash output in a range of -2.0 to +1.0. The flash  
compensation values are as follows for 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV.  
Step interval  
1/3 EV  
Flash compensation  
-2.0, -1.7, -1.3, -1.0, -0.7, -0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0  
-2.0, -1.5, -1.0, -0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0  
1/2 EV  
Set interval of steps in [1. EV Steps] (p.116) in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
77  
Set the flash compensation value by turning  
the rear e-dial (S) in the [Flash Mode]  
screen. Pressing the | (Green) button  
returns the flash exposure compensation to  
the default setting (0.0).  
Flash Mode  
Flash On  
0.0  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
• The flash exposure compensation cannot be set in B(Green) mode.  
Nappears in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel during the flash exposure  
compensation. (p.31, p.33)  
• If the maximum flash output is exceeded when corrected to the plus (+) side,  
no compensation will be effective.  
3
• Compensating to the minus (-) side may not affect the image if the subject is  
too close, the aperture value is small or the sensitivity is high.  
• The flash compensation is also effective for external flash units which support  
P-TTL auto flash mode.  
Allowing Shooting while Charging Flash  
You can also shoot while the flash is being  
30. Release While Charging  
charged.  
1
2
Off  
On  
in the [A Custom Setting 5] menu (p.87).  
Pictures cannot be taken while the flash is  
charging by default.  
Enables shutter release  
while the built-in  
flash is charging  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
78  
Playing Back Images  
Playing Back Images  
You can play back still pictures and movies shot with the camera.  
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to play back  
pictures using a computer. Refer to the provided “Quick Guide” for details on  
the software.  
3
1
Press the Q button.  
The camera enters Playback mode and  
the most recently captured image (image  
with the highest file number) is displayed  
on the monitor. (For movies, only the first  
frame is displayed on the monitor.)  
Press the M button during playback  
to switch the information display such as  
the image data for the displayed image.  
Refer to p.25 for display information  
details.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(45).  
4 : The previous image appears.  
5 : The next image appears.  
You can display the next or previous  
image by turning the front e-dial (R).  
Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.211) for playback function details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
79  
Deleting Images  
You can delete one image at a time.  
• Deleted images cannot be restored.  
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.231)  
1
Press the Q button and use the four-way controller (45)  
to select an image to delete.  
3
2
Press the i button.  
The delete screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Delete].  
100-0105  
Select the file format to delete for images  
saved in RAW+ format.  
Delete  
Cancel  
Deletes only the JPEG  
Delete JPEG  
image.  
OK  
OK  
Deletes only the RAW  
Delete RAW  
image.  
Delete  
Deletes both file formats.  
RAW+JPEG  
Press the 4 button.  
The image is deleted.  
When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
80  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Shooting Functions  
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced  
shooting functions available with the Q.  
Setting the Exposure ...........................................88  
Focusing .............................................................118  
Before Shooting (Preview) ................................129  
..............................................................................132  
Taking Pictures Continuously ...........................143  
Bracket) ...............................................................148  
Shooting with the Live View ..............................156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
82  
How to Operate the Shooting  
Functions  
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control  
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menus or [A Custom Setting] menus.  
For details on how to operate the menus, see “Using the Menus” (p.36).  
Direct Keys Setting Items  
Press the four-way controller (2345) in  
Capture mode to set the following items.  
4
Key  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Sets Continuous Shooting, Self-Timer,  
Drive Mode  
Remote Control, Auto Bracket or Mirror p.138  
2
Lock-up shooting.  
Flash Mode  
Adjusts the method of flash discharge.  
3
4
5
Adjusts the color balance to match the  
type of the light source illuminating the  
subject.  
White Balance  
Custom Image  
Sets the image finishing tone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
83  
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items  
Perform the following settings in the [A Rec.  
Mode 1-4] menu.  
Press the 3 button in Capture mode to  
display [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Sets the exposure mode when the mode  
dial is set to A.  
*1  
Exposure Mode  
4
*2  
File Format  
Sets the file format.  
JPEG Recorded  
Sets the recording size of images for  
JPEG shooting.  
*2  
Pixels  
*2  
JPEG Quality  
Sets the image quality for JPEG shooting. p.187  
A1  
Sets the range of automatic correction in  
AUTO.  
*2  
ISO AUTO Setting  
Expands the dynamic range and prevents  
*2  
D-Range Setting  
bright and dark areas from occurring.  
Corrects distortions and chromatic  
aberrations of magnification occurring due p.201  
to lens properties.  
*2  
Lens Correction  
*2  
Program Line  
Selects Program Line.  
Extended  
Bracketing  
Sets the Extended Bracketing shooting.  
*2  
Enables the capture of images at high  
dynamic range.  
*2  
HDR Capture  
*2  
A2 Digital Filter  
Applies filter effects when taking pictures. p.153  
Multi-exposure  
Sets the Multi-exposure shooting.  
Sets the interval shooting.  
Interval Shooting  
Adjusts the Shake Reduction unit for a  
better composition position and a more  
level camera.  
Composition  
Adjust.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
84  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Sets the movie settings.  
Sets the Live View display.  
Page  
Movie  
Live View  
Sets the status screen display and display  
color settings.  
Status Screen  
Digital Preview  
Instant Review  
Sets the Digital Preview settings.  
A3  
Sets the Instant Review display settings.  
Sets whether to display a bar graph of the  
electronic level in the viewfinder and on  
the LCD panel.  
Electronic Level  
Horizon Correction Corrects the tilt of the image.  
Color Space  
Sets the color space to use.  
RAW File Format  
RAW Button  
Sets the file format for RAW shooting.  
Sets the | button function.  
4
Sets the settings to save in the camera  
when the power is turned off.  
Memory  
USER  
Saves the current camera settings as  
A.  
A4  
Reduces vertical and horizontal camera  
shake.  
*2  
Shake Reduction  
Sets the focal length when using a lens for  
Input Focal Length which focal length information cannot be  
obtained.  
*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to A.  
*2 Can be also set using the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
85  
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items  
Set the [A Custom Setting 1-6] menu to fully use the functions of a SLR  
camera.  
Menu  
Item  
1. EV Steps  
Function  
Page  
Sets the adjustment steps for exposure. p.116  
Sets the adjustment steps for ISO  
sensitivity.  
2. Sensitivity Steps  
3. Expanded  
Sensitivity  
Expands the upper sensitivity limit.  
Sets the exposure metering time.  
4. Meter Operating  
Time  
4
A1  
5. AE-L with AF  
Locked  
Sets whether to lock exposure value  
when focus is locked.  
Sets whether to link the exposure and  
6. Link AE to AF Point AF point in the focusing area during  
multi-segment metering.  
Sets whether to shoot all frames with  
one release when using Exposure  
Bracketing.  
7. One-Push  
Bracketing  
8. Auto Bracketing  
Order  
Sets the order for Auto Bracket  
shooting.  
Sets whether to compensate  
automatically when the proper exposure  
cannot be determined.  
9. Auto EV  
Compensation  
10. WB When Using Sets the white balance setting when  
Flash  
using flash.  
Sets whether to automatically fine-tune  
the white balance when specifying the  
light source on the white balance  
setting.  
11. WB Adjustable  
A2 Range  
Sets whether to leave or adjust the  
tungsten light color tone when the white  
balance is set to F.  
12. AWB in Tungsten  
Light  
13. AF Button  
Function  
Sets the operation for when the =  
button is pressed.  
Sets whether to use the autofocus when  
the shutter release button is pressed  
halfway.  
14. AF with Press  
Halfway  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
86  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
15. Superimpose AF Sets whether to display the selected AF  
Area  
point in the viewfinder.  
16. AF with Remote  
Control  
Sets whether to use the autofocus when  
shooting with remote control.  
While using the remote control in  
p (Bulb) mode, sets whether to start  
exposure with a press and stop it with  
another press of the release button on  
the remote control, or to keep the shutter  
open as long as the release button on  
the remote control is kept pressed.  
17. Remote Control in  
Bulb  
A3  
18. Slow Shutter  
Speed NR  
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction  
when shooting at slow shutter speeds.  
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction  
when shooting with a high ISO  
sensitivity. Select from three levels.  
4
19. High-ISO Noise  
Reduction  
20. High-ISONR Start Sets the ISO start value in High-ISO  
Level  
Noise Reduction.  
21. Color  
Temperature Steps  
Sets the adjustment steps for color  
temperature.  
Sets the front and rear e-dials in e  
mode.  
22. e-dial in Program  
23. e-dial in Sv mode  
24. e-dial in Tv mode  
25. e-dial in Av mode  
Sets the front and rear e-dials in K  
mode.  
Sets the front and rear e-dials in b  
mode.  
Sets the front and rear e-dials in c  
mode.  
A4  
26. e-dial in TAv & M Sets the front and rear e-dials in Lor  
modes  
a mode.  
27. e-dial in B & X  
modes  
Sets the front and rear e-dials in p or M  
mode.  
Selects the exposure adjustment  
method when the | button is pressed in p.106  
Lor a mode.  
28. Green Button in  
TAv & M  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
87  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
29. LCD Panel  
Illumination  
Sets whether to illuminate the LCD  
panel.  
30. Release While  
Charging  
Sets whether to release shutter while  
the built-in flash is charging.  
31. Flash in Wireless Sets the built-in flash discharge method  
Mode  
in Wireless Mode.  
Provides an assist light when using the  
autofocus in dark locations.  
32. AF Assist Light  
33. Saving Rotation  
Info  
Sets whether to save rotation  
information when shooting.  
A5  
34. Auto Image  
Rotation  
Sets whether to automatically rotate  
images when playing back.  
When set to [On], if the focus mode is  
set to l and a manual focus lens is  
attached, catch-in focus shooting is  
enabled and the shutter is released  
automatically when the subject comes  
into focus.  
4
35. Catch-in Focus  
36. AF Adjustment  
37. Using Aperture  
Adjusts the AF focusing position.  
Sets whether to enable shutter release  
when the lens aperture ring is set to the p.294  
position other than s.  
A6 Ring  
Reset Custom  
Functions  
Resets all the settings in the [A Custom  
Setting 1-6] menu to the defaults.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
88  
Setting the Exposure  
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed  
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by the combination of  
shutter speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinations  
of shutter speed and aperture for a particular subject. Different  
combinations produce different effects.  
Effect of Shutter Speed  
By changing the shutter speed, you can manipulate how time is expressed  
in the pictures you create. Unlike with your own naked eyes, in a picture  
you can capture a fraction of a moment or a whole period of time, creating  
different effects.  
4
Use the b (Shutter Priority) mode.  
 Using slower shutter speed  
If the subject is moving, the image will be  
blurred because the shutter is open  
longer.  
It is possible to enhance the effect of  
motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) by  
intentionally using a slower shutter speed.  
 Using faster shutter speed  
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow  
freezing the action of a moving subject.  
A faster shutter speed also helps to  
prevent camera shake.  
Effect of Aperture  
By changing the aperture, you can control the depth of the area that  
appears in focus in the picture (the depth of field). By either narrowing the  
focus to emphasize a single point or giving depth to your picture instead  
you can completely change the feel of the picture you create.  
Use the c (Aperture Priority) mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
89  
 Opening the aperture (reduce the  
aperture value)  
Objects closer and farther than the  
focused subject will be more out of focus.  
For instance, if you take a picture of a  
flower against a landscape with the  
aperture open, the landscape in front and  
behind the flower will be blurred,  
emphasizing only the flower.  
 Closing the aperture (increase the  
aperture value)  
The range in focus expands forward and  
backward. For instance, if you take a  
picture of a flower against a landscape  
with the aperture narrowed, the landscape  
in front and behind the flower will be in  
focus.  
4
Aperture and Depth of Field  
The following table summarizes how the aperture affects the depth of  
field. The depth of field may also change depending on the lens used  
and the distance to the subject.  
Open  
(Smaller value)  
Close  
(Larger value)  
Aperture  
Depth of field  
Area of focus  
Shallow  
Narrow  
Deep  
Wide  
Longer  
(Telephoto)  
Shorter  
(Wide-angle)  
Lens focal length  
Distance to the  
subject  
Near  
Far  
• The depth of field for the Q differs depending on the lens but  
compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture  
setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).  
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject,  
the deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have a  
scale for depth of field because of their designs).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
90  
Setting the Sensitivity  
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.  
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent  
to ISO 100 to 3200. The default setting is [AUTO].  
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) while  
pressing the o button in  
Capture mode.  
The sensitivity displayed on the status  
screen and LCD panel and in the  
viewfinder changes.  
4
Press the  
|
(Green) button while pressing  
the button to return to [AUTO].  
o
2
Take your finger off the o button and rear e-dial (S).  
The sensitivity is set.  
• To set the sensitivity, you can also press the o button once and take your  
finger off the button, and then turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the  
sensitivity. In this case, press the o button again or turn off the exposure  
metering timer (p.114) to set the sensitivity.  
• When the exposure mode is set to B (Green), L (Shutter & Aperture  
Priority) or C (Movie), the sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO] and the setting  
cannot be changed.  
• When the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb), the upper sensitivity limit is ISO  
1600.  
When the exposure mode is set to  
(Bulb) or (Flash X-sync Speed), the sensitivity cannot be set to [AUTO].  
The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 100 to 6400 when [3.  
Expanded Sensitivity] in the [ Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85) is set to [On].  
K
(Sensitivity Priority),  
a
(Hyper-manual),  
p
M
A
• Captured images can show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You can  
reduce image noise by setting [19. High-ISO Noise Reduction] in the  
[A Custom Setting 3] menu. (p.92)  
• You can set whether to lock the sensitivity adjustment to increments of 1 EV  
or to coordinate it with the EV Steps (p.116) in [2. Sensitivity Steps] in the [A  
Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85).  
Setting the Range of Automatic Sensitivity Correction  
Set the range in which the sensitivity is automatically adjusted when the  
sensitivity is set to [AUTO]. The sensitivity is automatically corrected in the  
range of [ISO 100-800] by default.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
91  
1
Select [ISO AUTO Setting] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [ISO AUTO Setting] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
ISO AUTO Setting  
ISOAUTO  
100  
-
800  
(23) to set the minimum  
sensitivity.  
AUTO ISO Parameters  
MENU  
4
3
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to set the maximum  
sensitivity.  
ISO AUTO Setting  
ISOAUTO  
100  
-
800  
AUTO ISO Parameters  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [AUTO ISO  
Parameters].  
6
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select the parameter.  
ISO AUTO Setting  
ISOAUTO  
100  
-
800  
u: Increases the sensitivity as little  
AUTO ISO Parameters  
as possible  
s: Standard (Default setting)  
a: Actively increases the sensitivity  
MENU  
7
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
When [Highlight Correction] is set to O (On) in [D-Range Setting] in the  
[A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.199), the minimum sensitivity is ISO 200.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
Expanding the Dynamic Range  
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by the  
CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas. The larger it is, the  
better the whole range from dark to bright areas will appear in the picture.  
By expanding the dynamic range, you can expand the light level  
expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult for an  
overexposed area to occur in the image.  
To expand the dynamic range, use [D-Range Setting] in the [A Rec.  
Mode 1] menu. (p.199)  
Noise Reduction  
When you use a digital camera to shoot with a long exposure or high  
sensitivity setting, image noise (image roughness or unevenness)  
becomes noticeable.  
4
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. Images shot  
with Noise Reduction take longer to save.  
 Slow Shutter Speed NR  
Reduces noise during long exposures.  
Set in [18. Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu  
(p.86).  
The camera determines the conditions such as the shutter speed,  
On  
Off  
sensitivity, and internal temperature, and automatically reduces  
noise as necessary.  
Reduces noise only when the exposure mode is set to p and the  
shutter remains open for 30 seconds or more.  
 High-ISO Noise Reduction  
Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.  
Select [Off], [Low], [Medium], or [High] for [19. High-ISO Noise  
Reduction] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86). You can set the  
sensitivity at which to start noise reduction by setting [20. High-ISO  
NR Start Level] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
93  
Changing the Exposure Mode  
This camera features the following nine exposure modes. Use the mode  
dial to change the exposure mode. (p.39)  
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.  
Change  
Shutter  
Speed  
Change  
Sensi-  
tivity  
Exposure  
Mode  
EV Com-  
pensation  
Change  
Aperture  
Characteristics  
Page  
Lets you capture  
images with fully  
automatic settings.  
B
(Green)  
×
×
×
×
Automatically sets  
shutter speed and  
aperture to the proper  
exposure according  
toProgramLine when  
taking pictures. You  
can use the front and  
rear e-dials to switch  
between shutter  
4
e (Hyper-  
program)  
z
z
z
z
priority and aperture  
priority.  
Automaticallysetsthe  
shutter speed and  
(Sensitivity aperture to the proper  
K
Other  
than  
AUTO  
z
×
×
Priority)  
exposure according  
to the set sensitivity.  
Lets you set the  
desired shutter speed  
for expressing  
b
(Shutter  
Priority)  
z
z
z
×
z
z
moving subjects.  
Lets you set the  
aperture for  
controlling the depth  
of field.  
c
(Aperture  
Priority)  
×
z
Automaticallysetsthe  
sensitivity so that the  
manually set shutter  
L
(Shutter & speed and aperture  
AUTO  
only  
z
z
z
Aperture  
Priority)  
will give the proper  
exposure according  
to the brightness of  
the subject.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
94  
Change  
Shutter  
Speed  
Change  
Sensi-  
tivity  
Exposure  
Mode  
EV Com-  
pensation  
Change  
Aperture  
Characteristics  
Page  
Lets you set the  
shutter speed and  
aperture to capture  
the picture with  
creative intent.  
a (Hyper-  
manual)  
z
z
z
z
z
Other  
than  
AUTO  
(up to  
ISO  
Lets you capture  
images that require  
slow shutter speeds  
such as fireworks and  
night scenes.  
p (Bulb)  
×
×
1600)  
The shutter speed is  
locked at 1/180  
seconds. Use this  
when using an  
external flash that  
does not  
4
M(Flash  
X-sync  
Speed)  
Other  
AUTO  
z
×
z
automatically set the  
sync speed.  
Program Line  
In [Program Line] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu, you can choose from  
the following Program Lines including [AUTO]. When [1. Program  
Line] is selected for the | (Green) button setting in L/a mode  
(p.106) or in e/Kmode, exposure is regulated according to the set  
Program Line.  
Settings  
j AUTO  
k Normal  
Characteristics  
Camera determines the appropriate settings.  
Basic Program Automatic Exposure. (default setting)  
Hi-speed  
l
Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes high  
shutter speeds.  
Priority  
DOF Priority Program Automatic Exposure that closes the aperture  
m
n
(deep)  
as much as possible for a deep depth of field.  
DOF Priority Program Automatic Exposure that opens the aperture  
(shallow)  
as much as possible for a shallow depth of field.  
Program Automatic Exposure that prioritizes the best  
o MTF Priority aperture settings for the attached lens when a DA, DA  
L, D FA, FA J or FA lens is used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
95  
Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring  
When using a lens with an aperture  
ring, set the aperture to the s (AUTO)  
position while holding down the auto-  
lock button on the lens.  
Using the B(Green) Mode  
4
Lets you capture images with fully automatic settings.  
In Bmode, pictures are taken with the following settings.  
• Program Line  
• File Format  
j (AUTO)  
JPEG  
• JPEG Recorded Pixels  
• JPEG Quality  
• Sensitivity  
W
C
AUTO  
• Metering Method  
• AF Point  
L (Multi-segment Metering)  
S(Auto)  
• White Balance  
• Custom Image  
• Shake Reduction  
• Color Space  
F (Auto)  
Bright  
k (On)  
sRGB  
1
Set the mode dial to B.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
96  
• In Bmode, the following functions are not available.  
- Shutter Speed  
- Mirror Lock-up Shooting  
- Aperture  
- Multi-exposure  
- EV Compensation  
- Interval Shooting  
- Flash (Flash On, Slow-speed  
Sync, Exposure Compensation)  
- Continuous Shooting  
- Focus Mode k (available  
when l is selected)  
- D-Range setting  
- Extended Bracketing  
- Digital Filter  
- HDR Capture  
- Horizon Correction  
- Save as A  
- L and | button operations  
- Custom menu settings (available  
when all settings are default values)  
- Lens Correction  
- Exposure Bracketing  
• The control panel cannot be displayed in Bmode.  
4
Using the e (Hyper-program) Mode  
Automatically sets shutter speed and aperture to the proper exposure  
according to Program Line when taking pictures.  
Use the front and rear e-dials to change the shutter speed and aperture  
while maintaining the proper exposure (p.97).  
1
Set the mode dial to e.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
97  
2
Confirm the shutter speed and aperture.  
Confirm using the status screen, viewfinder or LCD panel.  
AF.S  
P
1/125  
F
5.6  
ISO  
AUTO  
100  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
AWB  
JPEG  
[
]
37  
14M  
• Set the Program Line to use in [Program Line] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu  
(p.94).  
• Set the EV compensation in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure  
steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)  
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed  
and aperture when the sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO] (p.90).  
4
e-dial in Program  
You can set the action for the front and rear e-dials in e mode with  
[22. e-dial in Program] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.86), and  
you can change the shutter speed and aperture while maintaining the  
proper exposure.  
Settings  
Front e-dial (R)  
b (Shutter Speed)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
c (Aperture)  
1
2
3
4
5
c (Aperture)  
b (Shutter Speed)  
P.SHIFT (Program Shift)  
EV Compensation  
– (Not Available)  
EV Compensation  
P.SHIFT (Program Shift)  
– (Not Available)  
• You can only set the shutter speed or aperture to a value that will  
give a correct exposure with the relative aperture or shutter speed  
range of the lens being used. If the brightness changes and the  
shutter speed or aperture is outside the relative range, the shutter  
speed or aperture will blink on the status screen and LCD panel  
and in the viewfinder.  
• Pressing the | (Green) button returns to Automatic Exposure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
98  
Using the K(Sensitivity Priority) Mode  
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.  
The shutter speed and aperture are automatically set according to the  
selected sensitivity to obtain the appropriate exposure.  
1
Set the mode dial to K.  
4
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to  
adjust the sensitivity.  
The shutter speed, aperture value and sensitivity are displayed on the  
status screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.  
AF.S  
Sv  
1/30  
F
4.5  
ISO 100  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
AWB  
JPEG  
[
]
37  
14M  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
99  
• You can set the sensitivity to values equivalent to ISO 100 to 3200. [AUTO]  
is not available.  
• In Kmode, you cannot change the sensitivity by turning the rear e-dial  
(S) while pressing the o button.  
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.115)  
Set the sensitivity in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in  
[1. EV Steps] in the [ Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)  
A
e-dial in Kmode  
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in Kmode.  
Set in [23. e-dial in Sv mode] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu  
(p.86).  
4
Settings  
Front e-dial (R)  
– (Not Available)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Sensitivity  
1
2
3
4
5
P.SHIFT (Program Shift)  
Sensitivity  
Sensitivity  
P.SHIFT (Program Shift)  
Sensitivity  
EV Compensation  
Sensitivity  
EV Compensation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
100  
Using the b (Shutter Priority) Mode  
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.  
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the  
shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed  
to have the subject show movement.  
Aperture value is automatically set to give the appropriate exposure  
depending on the shutter speed.  
1
Set the mode dial to b.  
4
2
Turn the front e-dial (R) to  
adjust the shutter speed.  
The shutter speed can be set within the  
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.  
The shutter speed and aperture value are displayed on the status screen  
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.  
AF.S  
Tv  
1/125  
F
5.6  
ISO  
AUTO  
400  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
AWB  
JPEG  
[
]
37  
14M  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
101  
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.115)  
• Set the shutter speed in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure  
steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)  
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed  
when the sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO] (p.90).  
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark,  
the aperture value will blink on the  
status screen and LCD panel and in the  
viewfinder. If the subject is too bright,  
choose a faster shutter speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter  
speed. When the aperture value indication stops blinking, you can  
take the picture with proper exposure.  
4
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject  
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.  
e-dial in b mode  
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in b mode. Set  
in [24. e-dial in Tv mode] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.86).  
Settings  
Front e-dial (R)  
b (Shutter Speed)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
– (Not Available)  
1
2
3
4
5
b (Shutter Speed)  
EV Compensation  
b (Shutter Speed)  
Sensitivity  
EV Compensation  
b (Shutter Speed)  
Sensitivity  
b (Shutter Speed)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
102  
Using the c (Aperture Priority) Mode  
Lets you set the desired aperture for controlling the depth of field. The  
depth of field is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear  
when aperture is set to a large value. The depth of field is shallower and  
the front and back of the focused object is blurred when aperture is set to  
a small value.  
Shutter speed is automatically set to appropriate exposure depending on  
the aperture value.  
1
Set the mode dial to c.  
4
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to  
adjust the aperture.  
Aperture range depends on the lens in  
use.  
The shutter speed and aperture value are displayed on the status screen  
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.  
AF.S  
Av  
1/30  
F
4.5  
ISO  
AUTO  
400  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
AWB  
JPEG  
[
]
37  
14M  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
103  
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.115)  
• Set the aperture value in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure  
steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)  
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture when  
the sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO] (p.90).  
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark,  
the shutter speed will blink on the status  
screen and LCD panel and in the  
viewfinder. When the subject is too  
bright, set the aperture smaller (larger number), and when too dark,  
open the aperture further (smaller number). Once blinking stops, you  
can take a picture with proper exposure.  
4
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject  
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.  
e-dial in c Mode  
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in c mode. Set  
in [25. e-dial in Av mode] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu (p.86).  
Settings  
Front e-dial (R)  
– (Not Available)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
c (Aperture)  
1
2
3
4
5
EV Compensation  
c (Aperture)  
Sensitivity  
c (Aperture)  
EV Compensation  
c (Aperture)  
Sensitivity  
c (Aperture)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
104  
Using the L(Shutter & Aperture Priority) Mode  
You can set both the desired shutter speed and aperture to take the  
picture.  
Automatically sets the sensitivity so that the manually set shutter speed  
and aperture will give the proper exposure according to the brightness of  
the subject.  
1
Set the mode dial to L.  
4
2
3
Turn the front e-dial (R) to  
adjust the shutter speed.  
The shutter speed can be set within the  
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to  
adjust the aperture.  
Aperture range depends on the lens in  
use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
105  
The shutter speed and aperture value are displayed on the status screen  
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder.  
AF.S  
TAv  
1/1000  
F
4.5  
ISO  
AUTO  
100  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
AWB  
JPEG  
[
]
37  
14M  
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) while pressing the m button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.115)  
• Set the shutter speed and aperture values in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.  
Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
(p.116)  
4
• In L mode, the sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].  
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark, the  
sensitivity will blink on the status screen  
and LCD panel and in the viewfinder. In  
this sort of situation, change the shutter speed and aperture. When  
the indication stops blinking, you can take the picture with proper  
exposure.  
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) filter if the subject  
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
e-dial in L& a Modes  
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in Land a  
modes. Set in [26. e-dial in TAv & M modes] in the [A Custom  
Setting 4] menu (p.86).  
Settings  
Front e-dial (R)  
b (Shutter Speed)  
c (Aperture)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
c (Aperture)  
b (Shutter Speed)  
1
2
Green Button in L& a  
The aperture and shutter speed are automatically adjusted to the  
appropriate exposure at the moment the | (Green) button is pressed  
in Land a modes. You can select an exposure adjustment  
method in [28. Green Button in TAv & M] in the [A Custom Setting 4]  
menu (p.86).  
4
The aperture and shutter speed are adjusted  
automatically according to Program Line (p.94).  
1
2
Program Line  
The aperture is locked and the shutter speed is  
adjusted automatically.  
b Shift  
The shutter speed is locked and the aperture is  
adjusted automatically.  
3
4
c Shift  
Off  
Disables Green button operation.  
• Shutter speed is adjusted to appropriate exposure according to  
lens aperture when lens aperture is not set to the s (Auto) position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
107  
Using a (Hyper-manual) Mode  
You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitable  
to take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode is  
convenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter  
speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker)  
or overexposed (brighter) photographs.  
1
Set the mode dial to a.  
4
2
3
Press the | (Green) button.  
Automatically switches shutter speed and  
aperture to the proper exposure.  
Turn the front e-dial (R) to  
adjust the shutter speed.  
The shutter speed can be set within the  
range of 1/8000 to 30 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
108  
4
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to  
adjust the aperture.  
Aperture range depends on the lens in  
use.  
The shutter speed and aperture value are  
displayed on the status screen and LCD  
panel and in the viewfinder.  
AF.S  
M
1/125  
ISO 100  
F
5.6  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
4
AWB  
JPEG  
[
]
37  
14M  
While adjusting the shutter speed or  
aperture value, the difference from the  
appropriate exposure (EV value) is  
Difference from the  
appropriate exposure  
displayed in a bar graph. The appropriate  
exposure is achieved when the indicator  
is displayed in the center of the bar graph.  
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is set to a  
mode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the Range of  
• Set the shutter speed and aperture values in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.  
Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
(p.116)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
EV Bar  
The EV bar appears on the LCD panel  
and viewfinder in a mode. The  
appropriate exposure is set when Vis in  
the middle of the EV bar. If it is towards  
-, it is underexposed. If it is towards +, it  
EV bar  
is overexposed. If the value exceeds the range of the EV bar (±5.0),  
the “+” or “-” blinks.  
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark, “+”  
or “-” in the EV bar will blink in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
4
Combining with L  
Press the L button (p.116) to record the exposure value in  
Hyper-manual. If the shutter speed or aperture is then changed, the  
combination of shutter speed and aperture changes while the  
exposure value is retained.  
Example:  
If the shutter speed is 1/125 seconds and aperture is F5.6 and is  
recorded by pressing the L button, and the shutter speed is  
changed to 1/30 seconds with the front e-dial (R), the aperture  
automatically changes to F11.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
110  
Using the p (Bulb) Mode  
This setting is useful for the long exposures required for shooting night  
scenes and fireworks.  
1
Set the mode dial to p.  
4
AF.S  
B
Bulb  
ISO 100  
F
5.6  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
AWB  
JPEG  
[
]
37  
14M  
2
Press the shutter release button.  
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept  
pressed.  
EV Compensation, Continuous Shooting and Exposure Bracketing are not  
available in p mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
111  
• Set the aperture value in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure  
steps in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.116)  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically disabled when the exposure  
mode is set to p mode.  
• Use a sturdy tripod and the cable switch CS-205 (optional) or Remote Control  
F (optional) to prevent camera shake when using p mode. Connect the cable  
switch to the cable release terminal (p.17).  
• To operate the shutter release button of the remote control, set in [17.  
Remote Control in Bulb] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86).  
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is set to p  
mode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the Range of  
• When the exposure mode is set to p, the upper sensitivity limit is ISO 1600.  
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, we  
recommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when shooting with  
a long exposure setting as the battery is used while the shutter remains open.  
(p.47)  
4
e-dial in p & Mmodes  
You can set the functions of the front and rear e-dials in p and M  
modes. Set in [27. e-dial in B & X modes] in the [A Custom Setting 4]  
menu (p.86).  
Settings  
Front e-dial (R)  
– (Not Available)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
c (Aperture)  
1
2
3
4
c (Aperture)  
Sensitivity  
– (Not Available)  
c (Aperture)  
Sensitivity  
c (Aperture)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
112  
Using the M(Flash X-Sync Speed) Mode  
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 seconds. Use this when using an  
external flash that does not automatically set the sync speed.  
1
Set the mode dial to M.  
4
AF.S  
X
1/180  
ISO 100  
F
5.6  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
AWB  
JPEG  
[
]
37  
14M  
• Turn the rear e-dial (S) to adjust the aperture value.  
• Press the | (Green) button to retain the shutter speed at 1/180 seconds and  
automatically adjust the aperture.  
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the exposure mode is set to M  
mode, the sensitivity is the lowest sensitivity set in “Setting the Range of  
Automatic Correction in AUTO” (p.90).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
113  
Selecting the Metering Method  
Choose the part of the screen to use for measuring brightness and  
determining exposure. The following three methods can be selected. The  
factory default setting is L (Multi-segment metering).  
Segments the viewfinder in 77 parts, meters each  
portion and determines the appropriate exposure.  
Multi-segment  
Center-weighted  
Spot Metering  
L
M
N
Measures the entire viewfinder with an emphasis on  
the center and determines the exposure.  
Measures only the center of the viewfinder and  
determines exposure.  
4
1
Turn the metering mode  
switching lever.  
The set metering method is displayed in  
the viewfinder and status screen.  
Using the Multi-Segment Metering  
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in 77  
different zones as shown in the illustration  
when using the multi-segment metering.  
Even in backlit locations, this mode  
automatically determines what level of  
brightness is in which portion and  
automatically adjusts exposure.  
The center-weighted metering mode is automatically set even if you select the  
multi-segment metering mode when using a lens other than a DA, DA L, D FA,  
FA J, FA, F or A lens, or when lens aperture ring is set to other than s (Auto).  
(Can only be used if [37. Using Aperture Ring] (p.294) in the [A Custom Setting  
6] menu is set to [Permitted].)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
114  
Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-Segment  
Metering  
In [6. Link AE to AF Point] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85),  
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during  
multi-segment metering.  
1
2
Off Exposure is set separately from AF point. (default setting)  
On Exposure is set in accordance with AF point.  
Using the Center-Weighted Metering  
Metering is weighted at the center of the  
screen. Use this metering when you want to  
compensate the exposure by experience,  
instead of leaving it to the camera. The  
illustration shows that sensitivity increases  
as the pattern height increases (center). This  
mode does not automatically compensate  
for backlit scenes.  
4
Using the Spot Metering  
With spot metering, brightness is measured  
only within a limited area at the center of the  
screen as shown in the illustration. You can  
use this in combination with the AE lock  
(p.116) when the subject is extremely small  
and the proper exposure is difficult to obtain.  
Setting the Meter Operating Time  
You can set the exposure metering time to [10sec.] (default setting),  
[3sec.] or [30sec.] in [4. Meter Operating Time] in the [A Custom  
Setting 1] menu (p.85).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
115  
Adjusting the Exposure  
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or under-expose  
(darken) your picture.  
Select 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
You can adjust the EV compensation from –5 to +5 (EV).  
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) while  
pressing the m button.  
The exposure is adjusted.  
4
m is displayed on the LCD panel and in  
the viewfinder during compensation.  
Press the m button to confirm the  
compensation value.  
Compensation value  
The EV compensation value is reset  
to 0.0 when the | (Green) button is  
pressed while holding down the m  
button.  
EV compensation is not available when the exposure mode is set to B  
(Green) or p (Bulb) mode.  
• To set the EV compensation, you can also press the m button once and take  
your finger off the button, and then turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the  
EV compensation. In this case, press the m button again or turn off the  
exposure metering timer (p.114) to set the EV compensation.  
• The EV compensation is not canceled by turning the camera off or by setting  
any other exposure mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
116  
EV Compensation for a and Mmodes  
For example, if the EV compensation value is set to +1.5 for a  
(Hyper-manual) and M(Flash X-sync speed) modes, an  
underexposure of 1.5 EV is displayed on the EV bar. If you set the  
exposure value so that the Vis displayed at the center of the EV bar,  
the image will be captured with the compensated value.  
Changing the Exposure Steps  
4
Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] in the  
1. EV Steps  
[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85) to  
increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.  
1
2
1/3 EV Steps  
1/2 EV Steps  
Exposure compensation steps  
now set to 1/3 EV  
Step interval  
Exposure setting value  
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0, ±3.3, ±3.7,  
±4.0, ±4.3, ±4.7, ±5.0  
1/3 EV  
1/2 EV  
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0, ±3.5, ±4.0, ±4.5, ±5.0  
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)  
AE lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking the picture. Use  
this when the subject is too small or backlit and a proper exposure setting  
cannot be obtained.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
117  
1
Press the L button.  
The camera locks the exposure  
(brightness) at that instant.  
@ is displayed in the status screen and  
viewfinder while the AE lock is engaged.  
Press it again to unlock.  
• The exposure remains locked as long as the L button is kept pressed or  
the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure remains in  
memory for a period between 0.5× to 2× the metering timer (p.114) even after  
taking your finger off the L button.  
• You will hear a beep when the L button is pressed. The beep can be  
turned off. (p.257)  
• AE lock is not available in B(Green), p (Bulb) or M(Flash X-sync Speed)  
mode.  
4
• When any of the following operations are performed, AE lock is canceled.  
- The L button is pressed again  
- The Q button, 3 button or M button is pressed  
- The mode dial is turned  
- The lens is changed  
- The lens with an aperture s (Auto) position is set to other than the s  
position  
• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on  
the zooming position even while the AE lock is engaged when using a zoom  
lens for which the maximum aperture varies depending on the focal length.  
However, the exposure value does not change and the picture is taken at the  
brightness level set by the AE lock.  
• Exposure can be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-L with AF  
Locked] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.126)  
Shooting While the Exposure is Automatically  
Changed  
Auto Bracket is a function for continuously shooting images with the  
exposure automatically adjusted for underexposure and  
overexposure. Each time the shutter release button is pressed, 3 or  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
Focusing  
You can focus with the following methods.  
The camera automatically focuses on the subject when  
the shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
Autofocus  
=
Manual focus  
Manually adjust the focus.  
\
Using the Autofocus  
You can also choose the autofocus mode from l (Single mode) where  
the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject and  
the focus is locked at that position, and k (Continuous mode) where  
the subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter  
release button is pressed halfway. The factory default setting is l.  
4
1
Turn the focus mode lever to l  
or A.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
119  
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus  
on the subject, the focus is locked at that position.  
• The focus is locked while ] is lit. To focus on another  
subject, take your finger off the shutter release button first.  
• The shutter cannot be released until the subject is in focus. If  
the subject is too close to the camera, move back and take  
the picture. Adjust the focus manually if it is difficult to focus  
on the subject (p.70). (p.126)  
l
(Single  
mode)  
• Press the shutter release button halfway. The AF assist light  
will flash automatically, making it easier to focus on the  
subject if the subject is in a dark area. (Effective range: up to  
5 m)  
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while  
the shutter release button is pressed halfway. Even if the  
subject is not in focus, the shutter can be released when the  
shutter release button is pressed fully.  
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus,  
the camera automatically tracks the subject if it is determined  
to be a moving object. The lens will automatically operate and  
continuously focus on the subject.  
k
(Continuous  
mode)  
4
2
Look through the viewfinder  
and press the shutter release  
button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder and you will hear a beep  
when the subject comes into focus.  
(When blinking, the subject is not in  
focus.)  
Focus Indicator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
Using the = Button to Focus on the Subject  
You can set the camera so that the focusing is performed when the =  
button is pressed.  
1
[A Custom Setting 2] menu.  
13. AF Button Function  
1
2
Enable AF  
Cancel AF  
AF is performed when  
the AF button is pressed  
4
Auto focusing is performed by using the = button or the  
shutter release button. (default setting)  
Enable AF  
Cancel AF  
\ appears in the viewfinder while the = button is  
pressed. Autofocus does not activate when the shutter  
release button is pressed. (Take your finger off the =  
button to return to normal autofocus mode.)  
2
3
Press the = button.  
Auto focusing is performed.  
When the subject is focused by pressing  
the = button, the focus lock is activated  
while the button is pressed.  
l (Single mode)  
The subject is kept in focus when the =  
button is pressed.  
k (Continuous mode)  
Press the shutter release button.  
The picture is taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
121  
AF Adjustment  
You can adjust the AF focusing position.  
• Be sure to use [AF Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should be  
taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture  
images with the appropriate focus.  
• Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain the  
accurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test  
shots.  
1
Select [36. AF Adjustment] in the [A Custom Setting 6]  
menu and press the four-way controller (5).  
4
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [On] and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [AF Adjustment] screen appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Apply All] or  
[Apply One].  
Apply All  
Applies the same adjustment value to all lenses.  
This item will appear on the display only when the lens ID is  
Apply One obtained. Saves and applies an adjustment value for each  
lens type. (Up to 20 lens types)  
4
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and adjust the value with the rear  
36. AF Adjustment  
Apply All  
+10  
e-dial (S) or the four-way  
Apply One  
Unset  
controller (45).  
Reset  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (5) or  
rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)  
Adjusts the focus to a closer position.  
Adjusts the focus to a farther position.  
Resets the adjustment value to ±0.  
Four-way controller (4) or  
rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)  
| (Green) button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
122  
5
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The adjustment value is saved.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to the Capture mode.  
Take a test picture.  
You can easily check the focusing position by enlarging the image during  
Live View (p.156) or Digital Preview (p.131).  
• Even when an adjustment value has been saved using [Apply One], if you  
press the 4 button with [Apply All] selected in Step 3, the [Apply All] value  
is used instead of the [Apply One] value.  
• To reset a saved adjustment value, select [Reset] in Step 3.  
4
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)  
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to. The factory default  
setting is S(Auto).  
The selected AF point lights red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area).  
U Center  
Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.  
jSelect  
Sets the focusing area to one of the eleven points in the AF area.  
The camera selects the optimum AF point even if the subject is  
not centered.  
S Auto  
Set with the AF point switching dial.  
• AF point is not displayed in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for [15.  
Superimpose AF Area] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86).  
• The AF point is fixed to Uregardless of this setting when using lenses other  
than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens. (p.292)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
123  
Setting the Focus Position in the Viewfinder  
1
Set the AF point switching dial to  
j.  
2
3
Look through the viewfinder and check the position of the  
subject.  
4
Press the 4 button.  
V appears in the viewfinder and the AF  
point can be changed.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the desired  
AF point.  
The AF point lights red in the viewfinder  
(Superimpose AF Area) and you can  
check where you set the AF point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
124  
• The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned  
off or the focusing area is switched to Uor S.  
• When any of the following operations are performed, changing of the AF  
point (in Step 3) is canceled.  
- The main switch is turned off  
- The mode dial is turned  
- The AF point switching dial is turned  
- The 4 button, Q button, 3 button, M button or U button is  
pressed  
Fixing the Focus (Focus Lock)  
If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot  
automatically focus on the subject. In this situation, you can aim the  
focusing area toward the subject, use the focus lock and recompose the  
picture.  
4
1
Turn the focus mode lever to l.  
2
Frame the desired composition  
for your picture in the viewfinder.  
Example:  
The person is out of focus  
and the background is  
focused instead.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
125  
3
Center the subject to focus in the  
viewfinder and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder and you will hear a beep when  
the subject comes into focus. (When  
blinking, the subject is not in focus.)  
4
5
Lock the focus.  
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain  
locked.  
4
Recompose the picture while  
keeping the shutter release  
button pressed halfway.  
• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ] is displayed.  
• Turning the zoom ring with the focus locked may cause the subject to be out  
of focus.  
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.257)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
Locking Exposure when Focus is Locked  
[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85) to lock the  
exposure value while the focus is locked.  
5. AE-L with AF Locked  
1
2
Off  
On  
AE is locked  
when the focus  
is locked  
1
2
Off  
On  
Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)  
Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.  
4
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)  
When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus  
indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.  
Using the Focus Indicator  
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in  
focus even during manual focus.  
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ].  
1
Turn the focus mode lever to \.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
127  
2
Look through the viewfinder,  
press the shutter release button  
halfway and turn the focusing  
ring.  
The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder and you will hear a beep when  
the subject comes into focus.  
4
Focus Indicator  
• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when the  
subject is difficult to focus (p.70) and the focus indicator will not stay lit.  
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.257)  
Using the Viewfinder Matte Field  
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.  
1
Turn the focus mode lever to  
\.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
128  
2
Look through the viewfinder and  
turn the focusing ring until the  
subject is clearly visible on the  
focusing screen.  
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode  
When [35. Catch-in Focus] in the [A Custom Setting 5] menu (p.87)  
is set to [On], if the focus mode is set to l and one of the following  
types of lenses is attached, catch-in focus shooting is available and  
the shutter is released automatically when the subject comes into  
focus.  
4
• Manual focus lens  
• DA or FA lens that has a =/\ switching on the lens (the setting  
on the lens must be set to \ before shooting)  
 How to Take Pictures  
1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.  
2 Turn the focus mode lever to l.  
3 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.  
4 Press the shutter release button fully.  
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes  
into focus in the set position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
129  
Checking the Composition, Exposure  
and Focus Before Shooting (Preview)  
You can use the preview function to check the depth of field, composition,  
exposure and focus before taking a picture.  
There are two preview methods.  
Preview Method  
Description  
Optical Preview For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.  
For checking the composition, exposure and focus on the  
Digital Preview  
monitor.  
You can also use the Live View function to display a real-time image on the  
monitor and change the shooting function settings during display and check the  
settings by enlarging the image. Refer to p.156 for details.  
4
Selecting the Preview Method  
Choose whether to use Optical Preview or Digital Preview when the main  
switch is turned to the preview position (|).  
The default setting is Optical Preview.  
1
Select [Digital Preview] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Digital Preview] screen appears.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Off (Optical Preview)]  
or [On].  
Digital Preview  
Off (Optical Preview)  
On  
Histogram  
Selecting [On] activates Digital Preview.  
Bright/Dark Area  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
130  
5
6
When [On] is selected in Step 2, use the four-way  
controller (23) to select [Histogram] or [Bright/Dark  
Area], and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or  
P.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
While setting Multi-exposure or shooting with Live View, or during interval  
shooting, Optical Preview is used regardless of the setting.  
Displaying the Optical Preview  
4
1
Position the subject inside the AF  
frame and press the shutter  
release button halfway to focus  
on the subject.  
2
Turn the main switch to | while  
looking through the viewfinder.  
You can check the depth of field in the  
viewfinder while the main switch is set to  
the position |.  
During this time, no shooting information  
is displayed in the viewfinder, and the  
shutter cannot be released.  
3
Take your finger off the main switch.  
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
131  
Displaying the Digital Preview  
1
Focus on the subject, then  
compose the picture in the  
viewfinder and turn the main  
switch to |.  
The icon (|) appears on the monitor  
during preview and you can check the  
composition, exposure and focus.  
4
AE.L  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Enlarges the preview image. (p.214)  
L button  
Saves the preview image. Select [Save as]  
and press the 4 button.  
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.  
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
132  
Preventing Camera Shake during  
Shutter Release  
Using the Shake Reduction Function  
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when  
the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking pictures in  
situations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake Reduction  
function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps slower  
shutter speed without the risk of the camera shake.  
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the following  
situations.  
• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,  
on cloudy days and in the shade  
4
• When taking telephoto pictures  
Picture taken with  
the Shake Reduction function  
Blurred picture  
The Shake Reduction function can be used to reduce horizontal and  
vertical camera shake or keep the image level.  
• The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by  
subject movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter  
speed.  
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when  
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended that the Shake  
Reduction function be turned off and the camera be used with a tripod.  
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a slower  
shutter speed, for example when shooting a moving subject or night scenes.  
In this case, it is recommended that the Shake Reduction function be turned  
off and the camera be used with a tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
133  
Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake  
1
Select [Shake Reduction] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select kor l.  
1
2
3
4
Color Space  
RAW File Format  
RAW Button  
Memory  
sRGB  
PEF  
k: Uses Shake Reduction. (default  
setting)  
USER  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focal Length  
l: Does not use Shake Reduction.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
3
4
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Aim the camera at the subject and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
kappears in the viewfinder and the  
Shake Reduction function is activated.  
Correcting the Tilt of the Images  
1
Select [Horizon Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select O or P.  
1
2
3
4
Movie  
Live View  
Status Screen  
Digital Preview  
Instant Review  
Electronic Level  
Horizon Correction  
MENU  
Exit  
3
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
134  
4
Aim the camera at the subject and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
The following indicators appear on the status screen.  
q: Shake Reduction On + Horizon Correction On  
r: Shake Reduction Off + Horizon Correction On  
• Set [Shake Reduction] to l (Off) when using the camera with a tripod or  
when this function is not needed.  
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l(Off) and cannot be selected  
in the following situations.  
- Self-timer shooting  
- Remote control shooting  
- Bulb shooting  
- HDR Capture  
- Mirror lock-up shooting  
4
- Wireless mode with an external flash  
The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) right  
after turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the  
Shake Reduction function to become stable before gently pressing the shutter  
release button to take a picture. When you press the shutter release button  
halfway and if  
picture.  
k
appears in the viewfinder, the camera is ready to take a  
• The Shake Reduction function is available with any Q compatible  
PENTAX lens. However, when the aperture ring is set to other than the s  
(Auto) position or a lens without an s position is used, the camera does not  
operate unless [37. Using Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6] menu  
is set to [Permitted]. Set this beforehand. However, in such cases some  
functions are restricted. Refer to “Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.294)  
for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected  
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information  
such as focal length.  
If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lens  
information is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction function  
is activated.  
The [Input Focal Length] setting screen appears when the camera is  
turned on with [Shake Reduction] set to k (On) and a type of lens that  
does not support automatic obtaining the lens information such as focal  
length (p.292) is mounted.  
Set the focal length manually in the [Input Focal Length] setting screen.  
• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lens  
that supports automatic obtaining the lens information such as focal length.  
• When using a lens without the s position on the aperture or with the aperture  
set to a position other than the s position, set [37. Using Aperture Ring] in  
the [A Custom Setting 6] menu to [Permitted]. (p.294)  
4
1
Use the four-way controller (45)  
or the rear e-dial (S) to set the  
focal length.  
Input Focal Length  
100  
135  
Select from the following 34 focal length  
values. (The default setting is [35].)  
120  
8
10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120  
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500  
550 600 700 800  
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to  
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).  
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting in  
the same manner.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
136  
• To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [A Rec.  
Mode 4] menu (p.84).  
• Effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well as  
focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as  
effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.  
Shooting with the Self-timer  
This camera has the following two types of self-timers.  
Shutter will be released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode to  
include the photographer in the picture.  
g
A mirror pops up immediately after shutter release button is pressed.  
Shutter is released after about 2 seconds. Use this mode to avoid  
camera shake when the shutter release button is pressed.  
Z
4
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
Drive Mode  
Single Frame Shooting  
to select g.  
MUP  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
137  
4
Press the four-way controller (3)  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g or Z.  
Drive Mode  
Self-Timer (12 sec.)  
MUP  
2
s
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Press the shutter release button  
halfway.  
4
The autofocus system operates. The  
focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
7
Press the shutter release button  
fully.  
For g, the front and back self-timer lamps  
start blinking slowly and blink rapidly 2  
seconds before the shutter is released.  
The beep is heard and the rate increases.  
The shutter will be released about 12  
seconds after the shutter release button  
is pressed fully.  
For Z, the shutter will be released about  
2 seconds after the shutter release button  
is pressed fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.257)  
• Exposure may be affected if the light enters the viewfinder. Attach the  
provided ME viewfinder cap or use the AE lock function (p.116). The light  
entering the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure  
mode is set to a (Manual) (p.107).  
Removing the Eyecup FR  
Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap  
4
• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the  
self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if  
[Drive Mode] in [Memory] (p.281) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu is set to P  
(Off).  
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) when g or Z is set.  
Shooting with the Remote Control (Optional)  
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remote  
control unit. This camera has the following three types of remote control  
shooting modes.  
The shutter will be released immediately after the shutter  
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.  
Remote Control  
h
i
Remote Control When the shutter release button on the remote control unit  
(3s delay)  
is pressed, the shutter is released after about 3 seconds.  
Continuous shooting starts when the shutter release  
button on the remote control unit is pressed. Press the  
shutter release button on the remote control unit again to  
exit continuous shooting.  
Remote  
Continuous  
Shooting  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
139  
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.  
4
Press the four-way controller (3)  
Drive Mode  
Remote Control  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select h, i, or i.  
MUP  
Wappears on the LCD panel. The self-  
timer lamp will blink to let you know that  
the camera is in remote control wait  
status.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
7
Point the remote control unit  
towards the remote control  
receiver on the front or back of  
the camera and press the shutter  
release button on the remote  
control.  
Approx.  
4 m  
The operating distance of the remote  
control unit is approximately 4 m from the  
front of the camera and approximately 2  
m from the back of the camera.  
Approx.  
2 m  
After the picture is taken, the self-timer  
lamp lights for 2 seconds and then returns  
to blinking.  
4
• You cannot focus with the remote control unit in default settings. Focus on  
the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.  
You can use the remote control to focus with [16. AF with Remote Control] in  
the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.86).  
• Exposure may be affected if the light enters the viewfinder. Attach the  
provided ME viewfinder cap or use the AE lock function (p.116). The light  
entering the viewfinder has no effect on the exposure when the exposure  
mode is set to a (Manual) (p.107).  
Removing the Eyecup FR  
Attaching the ME Viewfinder cap  
• Select a mode other than h, i or iin the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel  
the remote control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is  
turned off if [Drive Mode] in [Memory] (p.281) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu  
is set to P (Off).  
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) when h, i or iis set.  
• The remote control shooting may not be available in backlit conditions.  
• The remote control unit battery can send a remote control signal about  
30,000 times. Contact PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this  
will involve a fee).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
141  
Shooting with the Mirror Lock-up Function  
Use the Mirror Lock-up function if camera shake is evident even when the  
remote control or cable switch is used with a tripod.  
To use the Mirror Lock-up function, press the shutter release button to  
raise the mirror up. Press it again to release the shutter.  
This camera has the following two types of the mirror lock-up shooting.  
d Mirror lock-up Mirror lock-up shooting with the shutter release button.  
Mirror lock-up shooting with the remote control. The  
Mirror lock-up shutter will be released immediately after the shutter  
remote control release button on the remote control unit is pressed.  
e
(p.138)  
4
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select d.  
Press the four-way controller (3)  
Drive Mode  
Mirror Lock-up Shooting  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select d or e.  
MUP  
MUP  
d appears on the LCD panel.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
142  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
7
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The mirror pops up. AE lock function is enabled with the exposure value  
set immediately before the mirror pops up.  
8
Press the shutter release button fully again.  
4
The shutter is released and the picture is taken.  
• The mirror automatically returns to its original position if 30 seconds elapse  
after the mirror pops up when the shutter release button is pressed for the  
first time (except while setting Multi-exposure).  
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) when d or e is set.  
• Select a mode other than d or e in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel  
the mirror lock-up shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is  
turned off if [Drive Mode] in [Memory] (p.281) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu  
is set to P (Off).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
Taking Pictures Continuously  
Continuous Shooting  
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is held  
down.  
This camera has the following two types of continuous shooting.  
When [JPEG Recorded Pixels] is set to W and [JPEG  
Continuous  
Shooting (Hi)  
Quality] is C, pictures are taken continuously at  
approximately 5.2 frames per second. Up to 40 frames  
can be shot in one sequence.  
g
h
When [JPEG Recorded Pixels] is set to W and [JPEG  
Quality] is C, pictures are taken continuously at  
approximately 3.3 frames per second. Pictures can be  
taken continuously until the SD Memory Card is full.  
4
Continuous  
Shooting (Lo)  
When the file format is [RAW], up to 15 frames (PEF) for g(Continuous  
Shooting (Hi)) or up to 17 frames (PEF) for h(Continuous Shooting (Lo)) can  
be taken continuously.  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select g.  
Drive Mode  
Single Frame Shooting  
MUP  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
Press the four-way controller (3)  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g or h.  
Drive Mode  
Continuous Shooting (Hi)  
MUP  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
144  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take pictures continuously.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
6
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully  
pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.  
• If the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked  
on the first frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.  
• Focusing is continuously active during continuous shooting when the focus  
mode is set to k (Continuous mode).  
4
• You can also use the remote control for continuous shooting. (p.138)  
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the  
built-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release while charging  
the built-in flash in [30. Release While Charging] in the [A Custom Setting 5]  
menu. (p.77)  
• Select a mode other than gor hin the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the  
continuous shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if  
[Drive Mode] in [Memory] (p.281) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu is set to P  
(Off).  
• The shooting speed may be slower when [Lens Correction] (p.201) is set to  
O (On).  
Interval Shooting  
During interval shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set time.  
Interval shooting is not available when the mode dial is set to A, B(Green),  
p (Bulb) or C (Movie), or when Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter or HDR  
Capture is set.  
1
Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
145  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Interval].  
Interval Shooting  
Start Shooting  
:
Interval  
00 00 ' 00"  
2 images  
Now  
When taking two or more pictures, set the  
wait time until the next picture is taken.  
Number of Shots  
Start Interval  
Start Time  
Use the four-way controller (45) to  
select the number of hours, minutes, and  
seconds, and use the four-way controller  
(23) to set the time.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
You can set up to 24 hours, 00 minutes,  
and 00 seconds.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of  
Shots].  
4
Set the number of shots to be taken.  
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the number of shots to be taken.  
You can select between 1 and 99 shots.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval].  
Set the time when the first picture is taken.  
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Now] or [Set Time].  
Now Shooting starts immediately. You can take two or more pictures.  
Shooting starts at the set time. Press the four-way controller (3) to  
select [Start Time], use the four-way controller (45) to select the  
time, and use the four-way controller (23) to set the start time.  
Set  
Time  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start  
Shooting] and press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.  
Press the shutter release button  
Interval Shooting  
halfway.  
Standby  
The focus indicator ] appears when the  
subject is in focus.  
Remaining Shots 10 images  
:
Interval  
00 00 ' 00"  
MENU  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
7
Press the shutter release button fully.  
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set  
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.  
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in Step 2.  
After the set number of pictures is taken, the camera returns to normal  
Capture mode.  
The camera cannot be operated during interval shooting. To cancel the interval  
shooting, press any button on the back of the camera or press the shutter  
release button and the  
and then use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exit] and press the  
3
button to display the exit confirmation screen,  
4
button. You can also exit the interval shooting by turning the main switch off or  
turning the mode dial.  
When the interval shooting is set, Extended Bracketing and Multi-exposure are  
not available.  
4
Interval shooting is not available when the exposure mode is set to  
mode.  
p
(Bulb)  
9 (Single Frame Shooting) is selected regardless of the current drive mode  
setting.  
If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to  
l
(Single mode) or  
if the [Interval] setting is too short and the previous image processing cannot be  
completed before taking the next picture, no picture may be taken.  
Although each shot taken is displayed on the monitor with Instant Review, they  
cannot be enlarged or deleted.  
The [Interval] setting is disabled when [Number of Shots] is set to [1].  
Interval shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no more available  
space.  
If Auto Power Off function (p.270) turns the camera off during interval shooting,  
the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time approaches.  
It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when using the  
interval shooting over a long period of time. (p.47)  
Multi-exposure  
You can take multiple frames while creating a single picture.  
Multi-exposure is not available when the mode dial is set to B(Green) or C  
(Movie), or when Extended Bracketing, HDR Capture or Digital Filter is set.  
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of Shots].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
147  
3
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the number of  
shots.  
Multi-exposure  
Start Shooting  
Number of Shots  
2times  
Auto EV Adjustment  
Select from 2 to 9 shots.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV Adjustment]  
and use the four-way controller (45) to select or  
O
P.  
4
When O (On) is set, the exposure is adjusted automatically according to  
the number of shots.  
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start  
Shooting] and press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the Capture mode.  
Take a picture.  
The created picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the shutter  
release button is pressed. Press the  
i
button during Instant Review to discard  
pictures created up to that point and create again from the first picture.  
The picture is saved when the set number of shots has been taken, and  
then the [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.  
• When Multi-exposure is set, Interval Shooting and Extended Bracketing are  
not available.  
• Multi-exposure, Exposure Bracketing and Extended Bracketing cannot be  
used at the same time. The mode set last is used.  
[Lens Correction] setting (p.201) is disabled when Multi-exposure is set.  
• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the pictures  
that have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is exited.  
- The Q button, 3 button, four-way controller (2345), M  
button or | button is pressed  
- The mode dial is turned  
- Exposure Bracketing is set  
• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent  
composite image of the pictures taken is displayed. (It is not displayed when  
outputting to an external monitor.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
Shooting while Adjusting the  
Settings (Auto Bracket)  
Auto Bracket is a function for shooting while automatically changing the  
camera settings. There are two Auto Bracket modes: Exposure Bracketing  
and Extended Bracketing.  
You can set Auto Bracketing Order in [8. Auto Bracketing Order] in the [A  
Custom Setting 2] menu (p.85).  
Auto Bracketing Order  
0 ´ ´ +, – ´ 0 ´ +, + ´ 0 ´ –, 0 ´ + ´ –  
Shooting while the Exposure is Automatically  
Changed (Exposure Bracketing)  
4
You can take (3 or 5) continuous pictures with different exposure when the  
shutter release button is pressed. When taking 3 pictures, the first frame  
is exposed with no compensation, the second frame is underexposed  
(negative compensation) and the third is overexposed (positive  
compensation).  
Normal exposure  
Underexposure  
Overexposure  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select l.  
Drive Mode  
Exposure Bracketing  
MUP  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4+5  
0.5EV  
3image(s)  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
149  
3
Press the four-way controller (3)  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select l, b, or c.  
Drive Mode  
Exposure Bracketing  
MUP  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4+5  
0.5EV  
3image(s)  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
l
Shooting with the shutter release button.  
Shooting with the self-timer. Self-timer operates according to the  
self-timer (p.136) setting.  
b
Shooting with the remote control. Remote control operates  
according to the remote control (p.138) setting. When set to i  
(Remote Continuous Shooting), the shutter is released immediately.  
c
4
4
5
Turn the front e-dial (R) to set the number of shots.  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to set the EV compensation  
value.  
The following EV compensation values can be set according to the step  
interval set in [1. EV Steps] (p.116) in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
Step interval  
1/3 EV  
Bracket value  
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0  
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0  
1/2 EV  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder and EV compensation  
value appears on the status screen and LCD panel and in the viewfinder  
when the subject is in focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
8
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Continue to press the shutter release button until the set number of shots  
has been captured.  
Three or five consecutive images will be taken according to the order set  
• When the focus mode is set to l (Single mode), the focus is locked in the  
first frame position and used for subsequent continuous frames.  
• Even if you take your finger off the shutter release button during Auto  
Bracket, the Auto Bracket exposure setting will remain effective for twice as  
much time as the exposure metering timer (default setting is approximately  
20 seconds) (p.114) and you can take a picture at the next compensation  
value. In this case, auto focusing works for each frame. After about twice as  
much time as the exposure metering timer, the camera returns to settings for  
taking the first picture.  
• You can combine Auto Bracket with the built-in flash or external flash (P-TTL  
auto only) to change only the flash output continuously. However, when using  
an external flash, holding the shutter release button down to take three  
continuous frames may cause the second and third frames to be taken before  
the flash is fully charged. Always take one frame at a time after confirming  
that charging is complete.  
4
Exposure Bracketing is not available when the exposure mode is set to  
(Bulb) mode.  
p
• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.  
The mode set last is used.  
• When [7. One-Push Bracketing] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.85) is  
set to [On], even if the shutter release button is not continuously pressed  
fully, all frames are automatically shot with one press of the shutter release  
button.  
Taking Only Overexposed or Underexposed Pictures  
You can use Auto Bracket mode for only underexposure or  
overexposure shots by combining the operation with EV  
compensation (p.115). Auto Bracket is performed in both cases on  
the basis of the specified EV compensation value. (Up to ±8 EV)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
151  
Shooting while Adjusting Other Settings  
(Extended Bracketing)  
You can save pictures with three different White Balance, Saturation, Hue,  
High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness levels.  
Unlike Exposure Bracketing, three pictures are saved each time the  
shutter is released.  
1
Select [Extended Bracketing] in the [A Rec. Mode 2]  
menu and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Extended Bracketing] screen appears.  
4
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Extended Bracketing  
OFF  
Off  
Bracketing Amount  
MENU  
3
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose an item.  
Extended Bracketing  
OFF  
Off  
WB  
White Balance  
Saturation  
Hue  
High/Low Key Adj  
Contrast  
S
Sharpness  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Bracketing  
Amount] and press the four-way controller (5).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
152  
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the bracketing  
amount.  
For [White Balance], select from [BA±1] (default setting), [BA±2], [BA±3],  
[GM±1], [GM±2] or [GM±3].  
For other settings, select from [±1] (default setting), [±2], [±3] or [±4].  
7
Press the 4 button.  
8
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera returns to the Capture mode.  
9
Take the picture.  
4
Three frames are saved.  
• When Extended Bracketing is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and  
cannot be changed. You cannot use Extended Bracketing when the file  
format is set to [RAW].  
• When Extended Bracketing is set, Interval Shooting and Multi-exposure are  
not available.  
• Extended Bracketing, Digital Filter and HDR Capture cannot be used at the  
same time. The mode set last is used.  
• Exposure Bracketing and Extended Bracketing can be used at the same  
time.  
• When [Image Tone] for Custom Image is set to [Monochrome], [Saturation]  
and [Hue] are not available.  
• When [Fine Sharpness] is set for Custom Image, the sharpness of Extended  
Bracketing operates as Fine Sharpness.  
• When [Contrast] is set for Custom Image, the contrast of Extended  
Bracketing operates according to the [Contrast] setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filter  
You can apply a filter when taking pictures.  
The following filters can be selected.  
Filter name  
Effect  
Parameter  
Shading Level: +1/+2/+3  
Blur: +1/+2/+3  
For taking pictures that  
look as if taken with a toy  
camera.  
Toy Camera  
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/  
Yellow  
Toning: -3 to +3  
For taking pictures with the  
look of old photos.  
Retro  
Frame Composite: None/Thin/  
Medium/Thick  
4
For taking pictures with  
high contrasts.  
High Contrast  
+1 to +5  
For extracting a specific  
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/  
color and taking the rest of Green/Yellow  
Extract Color  
Soft  
the picture in black and  
white.  
Color Freq. Range: -2 to +2  
For taking pictures with a Soft Focus: +1/+2/+3  
soft focus throughout the  
Shadow Blur: On/Off  
image.  
For taking pictures of night Effect Density: Small/Medium/  
scenes or lights reflected  
on water with a special  
sparkling look achieved by  
adding cross-like effects to  
the picture's highlights.  
Large  
Star Burst  
Fish-eye  
Size: Short/Medium/Long  
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°  
For taking pictures that  
look as if taken with a fish- Weak/Medium/Strong  
eye lens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
154  
Filter name  
Effect  
Parameter  
High Contrast: Off/+1 to +5  
Soft Focus: Off/+1/+2/+3  
Tone Break: Off/Red/Green/Blue/  
Yellow  
Shading Type: 6 types  
Shading Level: -3 to +3  
Invert Color: Off/On  
Customize and save a filter  
to your own preferences.  
Custom Filter  
Distortion Type: 3 types  
Distortion Level: Off/Weak/  
Medium/Strong  
4
• When Digital Filter is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot  
be changed. You cannot use Digital Filter when the file format is set to [RAW].  
• When Digital Filter is set, Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure, Continuous  
Shooting in the drive mode and Auto Bracket are not available.  
• Digital Filter, Extended Bracketing and HDR Capture cannot be used at the  
same time. The mode set last is used.  
Depending on the filter used, images may take longer to save.  
1
Select [Digital Filter] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The screen to select the filter appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a filter.  
OFF  
Star Burst  
AE.L  
OK  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
155  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the parameter and the  
four-way controller (45) to  
adjust the parameter’s value.  
Effect Density  
AE.L  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Available operations  
Main switch (|)  
You can use Digital Preview to preview the  
background image with the selected filter.  
L button  
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 2 to finish shooting with digital filter.  
• You can also apply digital filter effects to images after shooting them in  
Playback mode (p.241).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
Shooting with the Live View  
You can shoot a picture or a movie while displaying the real-time image on  
the monitor.  
• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightness  
of the subject is low or high.  
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image  
may flicker.  
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not  
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become  
stable before shooting.  
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.  
• If you continue shooting with the Live View for a prolonged period, the  
internal temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality  
images. It is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To  
prevent a decrease in image quality, allow the camera to cool down between  
long exposure shots and movie recording.  
4
• If the internal temperature of the camera is high, l(temperature warning) will  
appear on the monitor and Live View may not be possible.  
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as in  
direct sunlight, l(temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel  
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.  
• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. However, if Live View is used  
even after l(temperature warning) appears, Live View may end before 5  
minutes elapse. Shooting with the viewfinder is possible even if Live View is  
ended.  
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur in  
the Live View image and/or captured image.  
• Shooting while holding the camera by hand and viewing the monitor can  
cause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.  
• The field of view of the image display is nearly 100%.  
• You can use the provided AV cable (I-AVC7) or a commercially available  
HDMI cable to display Live View images on a TV or monitor. (p.233)  
• Live View is not displayed when data are being saved to an SD Memory  
Card.  
• When the focus mode is set to l and the = button is pressed during  
Live View, the displayed image will disappear and the autofocus system  
operates. Once focused, the image will be displayed in Live View again.  
• The aperture value and shutter speed are not displayed on the LCD panel  
during Live View.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
157  
Taking Still Pictures  
Setting the Live View  
You can set the display items and autofocus mode for Live View.  
1
Select [Live View] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Live View] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Info Overlay], [Show  
Grid], [Histogram]or[Bright/Dark  
Area], and use the four-way  
Live View  
Info Overlay  
4
Show Grid  
Histogram  
Bright/Dark Area  
Autofocus Mode  
controller (45) to select O or P.  
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Autofocus  
Mode] and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Live View  
to select an autofocus mode.  
Info Overlay  
Show Grid  
Histogram  
Bright/Dark Area  
Autofocus Mode  
MENU  
Gives autofocus priority to detected faces and  
performs contrast autofocus. A yellow frame  
Face Detection +  
appears for the main face (white frames appear for  
I Contrast AF  
other faces), and autofocus and automatic  
(default setting)  
exposure are performed for the main detected  
face.  
Displays Live View and performs autofocus based  
i Contrast AF  
on the information obtained from the image sensor.  
Phase  
Difference  
Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the  
AF sensor.  
S
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
158  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
• It takes more time to focus on the subject when using [Contrast AF] than  
when using [Phase Difference]. It is also difficult for the camera to focus on  
the following objects (or with the following conditions).  
- Objects with poor contrast  
- Objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes  
- Objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as a  
water fountain  
- Objects whose distance from the camera is changing  
- Small objects  
- Objects appearing in both the foreground and background  
- When using a special filter  
4
- Objects at the edge of the screen  
• Face detection is not performed when the focus mode is set to \.  
Taking a Still Picture  
1
Set the exposure mode.  
Set the mode dial to any mode other than C.  
2
Press the U button.  
The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor.  
Press the U button again to exit Live View.  
Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When the Live View  
display is cancelled after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can be  
restarted by pressing the U button. If the internal temperature of the  
camera is high, Live View may end before 5 minutes elapse.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
159  
Live View display  
(All of the indications are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)  
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
USER  
2/5  
P
P
SHIFT  
9
10  
+1.0  
11  
12  
-
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4 +5  
2000 F2.8 ISO3200  
1234  
2000 F2.8 ISO400  
[
]
[
]
37  
13 14 1516 17  
18  
20  
19  
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Exposure Mode  
Flash Mode  
Drive Mode  
White Balance  
Custom Image  
Extended Bracketing/Multi-  
exposure/Interval Shooting/  
Digital Filter/HDR Capture  
10 AF frame  
11 EV Compensation  
12 Histogram  
13 AE Lock  
14 Shutter Speed  
15 Aperture  
16 EV bar  
17 Sensitivity  
7
Number of shots using Multi-  
exposure  
18 Remaining image storage  
capacity  
8
9
Battery level  
Electronic Level  
19 Face detection frame  
20 Main face detection frame  
* Indicator 10 is displayed in white during Live View and turns green  
when the subject is in focus. It turns red when the subject was not in  
focus. It is not displayed when the focus mode is set to \.  
* Indicators 19 and 20 are displayed when [Autofocus Mode] is set to I  
and the camera detects person’s face(s). (Up to 16 face recognition  
frames are displayed on the monitor.)  
3
Position the subject on the  
monitor and press the =  
button.  
The autofocus system operates.  
When the focus mode is set to \, turn  
the focusing ring until the subject is  
clearly visible on the focusing screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
160  
4
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
• When the focus mode is set to l and [Autofocus Mode] is set to I or i,  
press the 4 button and use the four-way controller (2345) to change  
the AF point. Press the 4 button again to cancel the changing of the AF  
point.  
• When the focus mode is set to k and [Autofocus Mode] is set to I or  
i, the camera focuses on the center of the screen when auto focusing  
starts and then automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus.  
• You can enlarge the image to 2, 4, or 6 times during Live View by pressing  
the M button. Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the display  
area, and press the | (Green) button to return the display to the center.  
When the focus mode is set to \, press the M button to enlarge the  
image to 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 times. Images captured in magnified display are  
recorded at normal size.  
4
• You can change the settings during Live View in the same way as when  
shooting with the viewfinder.  
• You can check the depth of field on the monitor by turning the main switch to  
| during Live View.  
Recording Movies  
You can record movies with a frame rate (number of frames shot per  
second) at 30 frames per second (fps), monaural audio, and the file format  
set to AVI.  
Changing the Movie Settings  
1
Select [Movie] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Movie] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
00:00'00"  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
Sound  
Movie Aperture Control Fixed  
(23) to select the number of  
recorded pixels.  
Shake Reduction  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
161  
Recorded Pixels  
Pixels  
Aspect Ratio  
F
1536×1024  
1280×720  
640×416  
3:2  
16:9  
3:2  
X (default setting)  
Y
3
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality Level].  
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select the quality level.  
Select from C (Best; default setting), D (Better) and E (Good).  
When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount of  
recordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.  
4
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
8
O: Records sound. (default setting)  
P : Does not record sound.  
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie  
Aperture Control].  
10 Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select [Auto] or [Fixed].  
Auto: The aperture is controlled automatically.  
Fixed: The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie  
recording starts. (default setting)  
11 Press the 4 button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
162  
12 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shake  
Reduction].  
13 Use the four-way controller (45) to select kor l.  
k: Uses Shake Reduction.  
l: Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)  
14 Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to record a movie.  
When [Sound] is set to O (On), the camera operation sounds are also  
recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do not  
operate the camera while recording.  
4
Connecting a Microphone  
You can connect a commercially available stereo microphone (3.5 mm  
(1/8 inch) stereo mini plug) to the microphone terminal on the camera and  
record stereo sound. Using an external microphone can also help to  
reduce the possibility of recording the camera operation sounds.  
1
Turn off the camera.  
2
Open the microphone  
terminal cover and  
connect the plug of the  
microphone to the  
microphone terminal  
on the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
163  
3
Turn the camera on.  
If the external microphone is disconnected during recording, the camera  
cannot switch to the internal microphone until recording has stopped. No sound  
will be recorded.  
If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the sound  
can be played back in stereo when you use a commercially available HDMI  
cable to output the movie to a HDMI-compatible AV device. (p.235) When you  
use the AV cable to output the movie, monaural sound is played back.  
Recording Movies  
4
1
Set the mode dial to C.  
The exposure mode is set to C (Movie),  
and Live View for movie capture is  
displayed.  
Sound  
Live View can be displayed for up to 5  
minutes. When the Live View display is  
cancelled after the elapse of 5 minutes,  
Live View can be restarted by pressing  
the U button. If the internal temperature  
of the camera is high, Live View may end  
before 5 minutes elapse.  
:
F2.8  
00 30'00"  
Recordable Time  
Shake Reduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
164  
2
Position the subject on the  
monitor and press the =  
button.  
The autofocus system operates.  
When the focus mode is set to \, turn  
the focusing ring until the subject is  
clearly visible on the focusing screen.  
3
4
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Recording of the movie starts.  
Press the shutter release button again.  
4
Recording stops.  
• When [Sound] is set to O (On), the camera operation sounds are also  
recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do  
not operate the camera while recording.  
• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.  
• The flash is not available.  
• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD  
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.  
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter  
kit K-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.47)  
• You can also use the optional remote control to control recording operations.  
(p.138)  
• When recording movies, only the White Balance and Custom Image (other  
than Fine Sharpness) settings can be used.  
• The sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].  
• If a high temperature is reached inside the camera during movie recording,  
the recording may be terminated for the sake of circuit protection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
Playing Back Movies  
Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the same  
manner as saved images.  
1
Press the Q button.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie to  
play back.  
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
4
Movie playback starts.  
Movie 10min00sec  
100-0001  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Pause/Resume  
Volume control (6 levels)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Frame advance (when paused)  
Fast forward playback while pressed  
Press and hold four-way  
controller (5)  
Four-way controller (4)  
Reverse playback/  
Frame reverse (when paused)  
Press and hold four-way  
Fast reverse playback while pressed  
controller (4)  
Four-way controller (3)  
Stop  
When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed.  
• You can use the provided AV cable (I-AVC7) or a commercially available  
HDMI cable to play back the recorded movies on a TV or other AV device.  
(p.233)  
• Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo,  
monaural sound is played back when you output the movie via the PC/AV  
terminal. When you output the movie via the HDMI terminal, sound is played  
back in stereo.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
166  
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie  
You can capture a single frame from a recorded movie and save it as a  
JPEG still picture.  
1
Pause the movie in Step 3 on p.165 to display the frame to  
save as a still picture.  
2
Press the L button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
4
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save as].  
Saves the image as a new file  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The captured image is saved as a new image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Using the Flash  
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of Q  
and describes how to take pictures with the external flash.  
..............................................................................168  
Flash ....................................................................171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
168  
Flash Characteristics in Each  
Exposure Mode  
Using the Flash in b (Shutter Priority) Mode  
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blur  
effect.  
• Any desired shutter speed 1/180 seconds or slower can be set for taking a  
flash photograph.  
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient  
brightness.  
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 seconds when a lens other than  
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A is used.  
Using the Flash in c (Aperture Priority) Mode  
• You can set the desired aperture to take a flash photograph when you  
want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.  
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.  
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 seconds  
to a slow shutter speed (p.64) that reduces camera shake. The  
slowest shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.  
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 seconds when a lens other than  
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F is used.  
5
Using the Slow-Speed Sync  
You can use slow-speed-sync in b (Shutter Priority) mode when shooting  
portraits with the sunset in the background. Both the portrait and the  
background are captured beautifully.  
• Slow-speed Sync shooting slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake  
Reduction function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod  
to avoid camera shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.  
• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
169  
Using e/K/c mode  
1
Set the mode dial to e, Kor c.  
2
3
4
Press the Ebutton.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
Select Gor Hand press the 4 button.  
The shutter speed is set slower to give the appropriate exposure for the  
background.  
5
Take the picture.  
5
Using b/L/a mode  
1
Set the mode dial to b, Lor a.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
3
4
Select Eor Fand press the 4 button.  
Set the shutter speed (for b mode) or shutter speed and  
aperture (for Lor a mode).  
Set so that proper exposure is obtained in 1/180 seconds or slower.  
5
6
Press the Ebutton.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
Take the picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync  
Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter  
curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,  
Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects  
depending on when the flash is discharged.  
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync,  
trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the  
car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will  
include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing lights behind it.  
5
Slow-speed Sync  
Trailing Curtain Sync  
1
Set the mode dial to any mode other than B, Mor C.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
3
4
Select Ior kand press the 4 button.  
Press the Ebutton.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
5
Take the picture.  
Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction  
function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid  
camera shake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
171  
Distance and Aperture when Using  
the Built-in Flash  
A set criteria is necessary between the guide number, aperture and  
distance when shooting with the flash to obtain the correct exposure.  
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not  
sufficient.  
ISO sensitivity  
ISO 100  
Built-in flash guide number  
Approx. 13  
ISO 200  
Approx. 18.4  
Approx. 26  
ISO 400  
ISO 800  
Approx. 36.8  
Approx. 52  
ISO 1600  
ISO 3200  
Approx. 73.5  
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value  
5
The following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.  
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value  
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5*  
*The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value  
which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.  
Example: When the sensitivity is [ISO 100] and aperture value is F2.8  
L1 = 13 ÷ 2.8 = approx. 4.6 (m)  
L2 = 4.6 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.9 (m)  
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.9 m to 4.6 m.  
The flash cannot be used when the distance is 0.7 m or less. When the  
flash is used at closer than 0.7 m, it causes vignetting in the picture corners,  
the light is distributed unevenly and the picture may be overexposed.  
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance  
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting  
distances.  
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance  
Example: When the sensitivity is [ISO 100] and shooting distance is 4 m,  
aperture value is  
F = 13 ÷ 4 = 3.25  
If the resulting number (3.25, in the above example) is not available as  
a lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the above  
example) is generally used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
172  
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in  
Flash  
Depending on the lens used with the Q, even if a lens without a hood  
is attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be possible or may be  
limited due to vignetting.  
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without  
problems.  
* Following are evaluated without a hood.  
Unavailable due to vignetting  
Lens name  
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)  
DA12-24mm F4ED AL  
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)  

FA 300mm F2.8ED (IF)  
5

FA 600mm F4ED (IF)  

FA 250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)  
Available depending on other factors  
Lens name  
Restrictions  
Vignetting may occur if focal length is less than  
20 mm.  
F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5  
When the focal length is less than 28 mm or  
when the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting  
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.  
DA16-45mm F4ED AL  
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when  
the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting  
distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may  
occur.  

DA 16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM  
When the focal length is less than 24 mm or  
when the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting  
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.  
DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less  
than 35 mm.  
DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)  
Vignetting may occur if focal length is 28 mm  
and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.  

FA 28-70mm F2.8AL  
FA SOFT 28mm F2.8  
FA SOFT 85mm F2.8  
Built-in flash always discharges fully.  
Built-in flash always discharges fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
173  
Using an External Flash (Optional)  
Using the optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or  
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash  
mode, depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for  
details.  
(z: Available #: Restricted ×: Not available)  
Flash  
Built-in  
flash  
AF540FGZ AF200FG  
AF360FGZ AF160FC  
Camera function  
Red-eye reduction flash  
Automatic flash discharge  
z
z
z
z
z
z
After the flash is fully charged, the camera  
automatically switches to the flash sync  
speed.  
z
z
z
5
Aperture is automatically set in e and b  
modes.  
z
z
×
z
×
Auto check in the viewfinder  
×
P-TTL auto flash (appropriate sensitivity:  
ISO 100 to 3200)  
*1  
*1  
*1  
z
z
z
Slow-speed Sync  
z
z
×
z
z
z
z
z
z
×
z
z
×
Flash exposure compensation  
AF Assist Light of the external flash  
*2  
Trailing Curtain Sync  
z
×
*3  
*4  
Contrast-control-sync flash mode  
Slave flash  
#
#
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Multiple flash  
High-speed flash sync  
Wireless flash  
z
z
*4  
*5  
#
*1 Available only when using DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.  
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 seconds or slower.  
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be  
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.  
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.  
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units or a combination of an AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ  
unit and the built-in flash is required.  
Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)  
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera or flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
174  
About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ  
The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT  
size to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital  
Camera, the difference in focal length between 35 mm film camera  
and the Q is automatically calculated based on the difference in  
angle of view and is displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D  
FA, FA J, FA or F lens).  
The conversion indicator appears and the format size indicator  
disappears when the exposure metering timer of the Q is on (it  
returns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer is  
turned off).  
Lens focal length 85mm 77mm 50mm 35mm 28mm 24mm 20mm 18 mm  
Exposuremetering  
85mm  
70mm 50mm  
35mm  
28mm 24mm*  
timer Off  
Exposuremetering  
timer On  
58mm  
48mm 34mm  
24mm  
19mm 16mm*  
5
* Using wide-angle panel  
Using P-TTL Auto Mode  
You can use [P-TTL auto] with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or  
AF160FC flash unit. The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash and  
confirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it is  
backlit, etc.) using the camera 77-segment metering sensor. The flash  
output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained  
from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more appropriate  
exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.  
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external  
flash.  
2
3
4
Turn on the camera and the external flash.  
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL auto].  
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then  
take the picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
175  
• P-TTL auto is only available with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or  
AF160FC flash unit.  
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).  
• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash  
mode is C or i. Therefore, it may not be suitable for daylight-sync  
shooting.  
• Never press the Ebutton when any external flash unit is attached to the  
camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both at  
once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.  
(p.180).  
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please read the  
manual for the external flash.  
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode  
With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take a  
picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 seconds.  
5
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external  
flash (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) to the camera.  
2
3
4
Set the exposure mode to b or a.  
Turn on the camera and the external flash.  
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (High-speed  
flash sync).  
5
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then  
take the picture.  
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).  
High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is faster than  
1/180 seconds.  
• High-speed flash sync is not available when the exposure mode is set to p  
(Bulb).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
176  
Using in Wireless Mode  
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the  
built-in flash with an external flash, you can shoot in P-TTL flash mode  
without connecting the flash units with a cord.  
• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.  
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use  
High-speed flash sync in the wireless mode. This function cannot be used in  
combination with the built-in flash.  
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the  
camera to SLAVE.  
Setting the Channel for the External Flash on the Camera  
First set the channel for the external flash unit on the camera.  
5
1
Set the channel for the external flash unit.  
2
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external  
flash.  
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the  
shutter release button halfway.  
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.  
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash is  
displayed in the viewfinder for 10 seconds.  
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of  
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the  
external flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
177  
Using the Built-in Flash Wirelessly  
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in  
combination with the built-in flash.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
2
Select rand press the 4  
button.  
Flash Mode  
Wireless Mode  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
0.0  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
r cannot be set when the exposure mode is set to B (Green).  
• When the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)), d (Mirror  
lock-up) or e (Mirror lock-up remote control), or the lens aperture is not set  
to the s position, rcannot be selected.  
Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method  
You can change the built-in flash discharge method in wireless mode.  
Set in [31. Flash in Wireless Mode] in the [A Custom Setting 5] menu  
(p.87).  
1
2
On  
Off  
Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (Default setting)  
Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.  
HSb (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
178  
Wireless Shooting  
 Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash  
Unit  
1
Remove the external flash unit after the channel was set  
on the camera, and place at the desired location.  
2
3
Set the flash mode of the camera to r, and press the E  
button.  
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take  
the picture.  
 Using a Combination of External Flash Units  
5
1
Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly  
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].  
Discharges both the flash directly connected to the camera  
and the wireless flash unit.  
MASTER  
The flash directly connected to the camera is discharged as  
CONTROL  
a control flash only and does not discharge as main flash.  
2
3
On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash  
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel  
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place  
at the desired location.  
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take  
the picture.  
• [Shake Reduction] and [Horizon Correction] are automatically turned off in  
the wireless mode.  
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing  
high-speed flash sync shooting in the wireless mode, set the flash directly  
connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)  
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for  
wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between  
the flash units before the flash is discharged.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
1 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash  
(relays the flash mode of the camera).  
2 The wireless remote flash emits a control flash (relays  
confirmation of subject).  
3 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash  
(relays flash output to the wireless remote flash).  
* The flash directly connected to the camera will emit a control flash one  
more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HSb (High-  
speed flash sync) is set.  
4 The wireless remote flash discharges at the same time as the  
main flash.  
5
When the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the  
camera is set to [MASTER] or [31. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.177) is set  
to [On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.  
Red-Eye Reduction  
As with the built-in flash, red-eye reduction is available with an external  
flash. However, depending on the type of the flash, this function may not  
be available or may have some restrictions for usage conditions. See the  
chart on p.173.  
• The red-eye reduction function works by discharging the flash twice even  
when only an external flash is used. (p.75)  
• If red-eye reduction of the built-in flash is used when the external flash is set  
as the slave unit or with the wireless function, the preflash for red-eye  
reduction will trigger the external flash. Do not use red-eye reduction when  
using a slave unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
180  
Trailing Curtain Sync  
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or  
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing Curtain Sync function, the built-in  
flash will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully charged  
before shooting.  
Connecting an External Flash with an  
Extension Cord  
When using the built-in flash with an external flash that does not have  
wireless flash mode function such as AF200FG, attach the Hot Shoe  
Adapter FG (optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe  
Adapter F (optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect these  
with the Extension Cord F5P (optional) as shown in the illustration below.  
The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted using the tripod screw  
to your tripod.  
5
Only the P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in  
flash.  
When combining with the built-in flash  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
181  
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension  
Cords  
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination with  
the built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on  
the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG unit as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external flash  
and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F  
(optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F with  
external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).  
Refer to the manual of the flash for details.  
When combining two or more external flashes  
5
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts  
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.  
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment  
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.  
When using multiple external flashes or an external flash with the built-in flash,  
P-TTL is used for flash control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
182  
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash  
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash  
allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash  
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of  
light discharged from multiple units.  
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.  
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts  
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.  
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment  
breakdown. We recommend using PENTAX automatic flashes.  
1
Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly. (p.180)  
5
2
Set the sync mode for the external flash to the Contrast-  
Control-Sync mode.  
3
4
Set the exposure mode to e, b, c or a.  
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are  
fully charged and then take a picture.  
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync mode  
is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master unit)  
: 1 (slave units). When external flash is used in combination with the built-in  
flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).  
• When using multiple external flashes or an external flash with the built-in  
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
183  
X-sync Socket  
You can connect an external flash to the  
camera with a sync cord by using the X-sync  
socket.  
Remove the Sync socket 2P cap and  
connect a sync cord to the X-sync socket.  
• The use of high-voltage or high-current external flashes may cause a camera  
breakdown.  
• Flashes with reversed polarity (the center of the sync plug is minus) cannot  
be used due to the risk of damaging the camera or flash.  
• When a sync cord is connected to the X-sync socket, linked functions will not  
work.  
• To prevent vignetting caused from Trailing Curtain Sync, it is recommended  
to take a test shot using a shutter speed one level slower than the flash sync  
speed.  
5
The contact of the X-sync socket is not dust-proof and water-resistant. Attach  
the provided Sync socket 2P cap when not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
184  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Shooting Settings  
This chapter describes how to set the save format for  
pictures taken and other settings.  
Setting the File Format ......................................186  
Setting the White Balance .................................191  
Correcting Images ..............................................199  
..............................................................................205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
186  
Setting the File Format  
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels  
You can select the number of recorded pixels from W, J, P and i.  
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file  
size. The file size will also differ according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.  
The default setting is W.  
Recorded Pixels  
Pixels  
Paper Size  
14"×17" / A2 paper  
10"×12" / A3 paper  
8"×10" / A4 paper  
5"×7" / A5 paper  
W
J
P
i
4672×3104  
3936×2624  
3072×2048  
1728×1152  
The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded  
pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the  
quality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of  
other factors.  
6
1
Select [JPEG Recorded Pixels] in the [A Rec. Mode 1]  
menu and press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the number of recorded  
pixels.  
120  
JPEG  
File Format  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
ISO AUTO Setting  
D-Range Setting  
Lens Correction  
14M  
10M  
6M  
When the number of recorded pixels is  
changed, the number of recordable  
images appears at the top right of the  
screen.  
2M  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
187  
Setting the JPEG Quality Level  
You can set the image quality level. The file size will also differ according  
to the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] setting. The default setting is C (Best).  
Z Premium  
Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.  
Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.  
C Best  
D
E
Better  
Good  
1
Select [JPEG Quality] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the quality level.  
120  
File Format  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
ISO AUTO Setting  
D-Range Setting  
Lens Correction  
JPEG  
14M  
When the quality level is changed, the  
number of recordable images at that  
quality level appears at the top right of the  
screen.  
6
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
188  
Setting the File Format  
You can set the format of image files.  
Captures images in JPEG format. You can change the number of  
JPEG recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded Pixels] and the image quality level  
in [JPEG Quality]. (default setting)  
RAW data are CMOS sensor output data saved without processing.  
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not  
applied to the images, but they are saved as actual original  
RAW information. When you perform the development process by using  
RAW Development function (p.247), or using the provided software  
(PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4) after transferring RAW data to a  
computer, you can create JPEG or TIFF images with these effects.  
Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats. When the |  
RAW+ button is pressed, images are temporarily captured in both formats.  
When Extended Bracketing (p.151), Digital Filter (p.153) or HDR Capture  
(p.200) is set, the file format is set to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. To  
change the file format, turn these functions off.  
6
1
Select [File Format] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a file format.  
120  
File Format  
JPEG  
JPEG Recorded Pixels RAW  
When the file format is changed, the  
number of recordable image appears at  
the top right of the screen.  
JPEG Quality  
ISO AUTO Setting  
D-Range Setting  
Lens Correction  
ޓ
RAW+  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
189  
Setting the RAW File Format  
You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAW  
File Format] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu  
(p.84) when images are captured in RAW  
format.  
1
2
3
4
Color Space  
RAW File Format  
RAW Button  
Memory  
sRGB  
PEF  
DNG  
USER  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focal Length  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
PEF  
PENTAX original RAW file format (default setting)  
General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by  
Adobe Systems  
DNG  
Setting the RAW Button Function  
You can set the function when the | button is pressed.  
6
1
Select [RAW Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [RAW Button] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select O or P for [Cancel after  
RAW Button  
Cancel after 1 shot  
1 shot].  
JPEG  
RAW  
RAW+  
RAW+  
RAW+  
RAW+  
MENU  
The recording format returns to the original file format after a  
picture taken. (default setting)  
O
P
The setting is canceled when the following operations are  
performed.  
- the | button is pressed again  
- the Q or 3 button is pressed  
- the main switch turned off  
- the mode dial is turned  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
190  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.  
The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format  
when the | button is pressed.  
Press the four-way controller  
RAW Button  
(5), and use the four-way  
Cancel after 1 shot  
controller (23) to select a file  
format when the | button is  
pressed.  
JPEG  
RAW  
JPEG
RAW  
RAW+  
RAW+  
RAW+  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
Setting the White Balance  
White balance is the function for adjusting the color of an image so that  
white objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied  
with the color balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F  
(Auto), or to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images.  
Color  
Item  
Settings  
*1  
Temperature  
Automatically adjusts the white balance. Approx.4,000to  
(default setting) 8,000K  
Auto  
F
Daylight  
For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K  
G
For use when taking pictures in the  
shade. It reduces the bluish color tones Approx. 8,000K  
in a picture.  
Shade  
Cloudy  
H
For use when taking pictures on cloudy  
Approx. 6,000K  
days.  
^
For use when taking pictures under  
fluorescent lighting. Select the type of  
fluorescent light.  
6
Fluorescent  
Light  
D
N
W
L
Fluorescent Light Daylight Color  
Fluorescent Light Daylight White  
Fluorescent Light Cool White  
Fluorescent Light Warm White  
Approx. 6,500K  
Approx. 5,000K  
Approx. 4,200K  
Approx. 3,000K  
J
For use when taking pictures under light  
bulb or other tungsten light. It reduces  
the reddish color tones in a picture.  
Tungsten  
Light  
Approx. 2,850K  
Approx. 5,400K  
I
For use when taking pictures using the  
built-in flash.  
Flash  
L
CTE  
Use this to keep and strengthen the  
color tone of the light source in the  
image.  
*2  
Use this to manually adjust the white  
balance according to the lighting so that  
white objects appear as a natural white.  
Manual  
Color  
K
Use figures to set the color temperature.  
Temperature You can save three settings.  
K
*1 The color temperature (K) is an estimate. This does not indicate precise colors.  
*2 CTE= Color Temperature Enhancement  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
192  
1
Press the four-way controller (4) in Capture mode.  
The [White Balance] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the white balance.  
White Balance  
Auto  
CTE  
AE.L  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Available operations  
Main switch (|)  
You can use Digital Preview to preview the  
background image with the setting applied.  
L button  
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
6
3
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• The camera automatically performs fine-tuning even when the light source is  
specified. The color temperature of the light source is fixed when [11. WB  
Adjustable Range] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.85) is set to [Fixed].  
• Because the light source changes when the flash discharges, you can set the  
white balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],  
[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [10. WB When Using Flash] in the [A Custom  
Setting 2] menu (p.85).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
193  
Fine-tuning the White Balance  
You can fine-tune the white balance settings.  
1
Perform desired settings in Step 2 on p.192.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The fine-tuning screen appears.  
3
Fine-tune the white balance.  
Shade  
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available  
on the G-M and B-A axes.  
G
B
A
G1  
0
M
0
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Available operations  
6
Four-way controller (23)  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between  
green (G) and magenta (M).  
Four-way controller (45)  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between  
blue (B) and amber (A).  
| (Green) button  
Resets the adjustment value.  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
When set to K, the white balance can also be measured by pressing the  
shutter release button fully (except while recording a movie).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
194  
Adjusting the White Balance Manually  
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when  
taking pictures. With the manual white balance, the camera can store  
delicate shades that cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance  
preset values provided in the camera. This provides the optimum white  
balance for your surroundings.  
1
Select K/K in Step 2 on p.192 and press the four-way  
controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select K and press the four-  
White Balance  
Manual  
way controller (5).  
5000k  
5000k  
5000k  
CTE  
OK  
OK  
MENU  
6
Cancel  
Check  
3
4
5
Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display  
a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a white  
area as the subject.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Set the focus mode to \ when the shutter cannot be released.  
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.  
Use the rear e-dial (S) to select  
the entire screen or spot area for  
the measuring range.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
195  
6
7
When a spot area is selected, use  
the four-way controller (2345)  
to move the frame to the position  
you want to measure.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
Manual  
White Balance  
SHUTTER  
The white balance fine-tuning screen  
appears when measuring is completed.  
Adjust the white balance if necessary.  
Adjust  
G
B
A
0
0
0
M
AE.L  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
6
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust  
the white balance.  
• [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears when measuring is  
unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while displayed to return to the screen  
for remeasuring.  
• If the picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, white balance may  
not be adjusted. In this case, adjust appropriate exposure first and then  
adjust the white balance.  
• When the mode dial is set to C (Movie), the white balance cannot be  
measured. Adjust the white balance in any exposure mode other than  
C (Movie) before recording a movie.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
Adjusting the White Balance with Color  
Temperature  
Use figures to set the color temperature.  
1
Select K/K in Step 2 of p.192 and press the four-way  
controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the color  
temperature (default setting: 5000K).  
You can save three settings. Settings are saved to the location selected  
here.  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Color Temperature] screen appears.  
Adjust the color temperature with  
the front or rear e-dial.  
Color  
Temperature  
K
6
G
5000K  
B
A
0
0
M
0
OK  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
Color temperature steps differ depending on the e-dial.  
e-dial  
Kelvin  
Mired*  
Front (R)  
Rear (S)  
1 Step (100K)  
10 Steps (1000K)  
1 Step (20M)  
5 Steps (100M)  
* The default setting for Color Temperature step units is [Kelvin]. You can change the  
step units to [Mired] in [21. Color Temperature Steps] in the [A Custom Setting 3]  
menu (p.86). However, figures are converted to Kelvin and displayed.  
You can also use the steps for “Fine-tuning the White Balance” (p.193)  
for fine-tuning.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
197  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The settings are saved and the camera returns to the [White Balance]  
screen.  
Turn the main switch to | to display Digital Preview with the set color  
temperature.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Color Temperature  
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises,  
and towards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperature  
describes this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature  
(K: Kelvin). This camera is capable of setting the white balance to  
enable taking pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting  
conditions.  
Red tint  
Blue tint  
6
[
]
2000  
3000  
4000 5000 6000  
8000 10000 12000  
K
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
198  
Saving the White Balance Setting of a  
Captured Image  
You can copy the white balance setting of a captured image and save it as  
Manual White Balance.  
1
In Playback mode, display the image with the white  
balance setting you want to copy.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select K (Save  
as Manual WB) and press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select the image.  
6
4
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Save] and press the  
4 button.  
100-0105  
Manual White Balance is  
now set accorrdingg tto the  
currennt imaggees's collor balance  
The white balance setting of the selected  
image is saved to Manual White Balance  
and the camera switches to Capture  
Save  
Cancel  
mode. The white balance setting is K  
OK  
OK  
(Manual).  
• Only the white balance setting of still pictures captured with this camera can  
be copied.  
• You cannot select a still picture that has been captured from a movie and  
saved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
199  
Correcting Images  
The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted when  
taking pictures.  
Adjusting the Brightness  
Adjusts the brightness and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring.  
D-Range Setting  
Expands the dynamic range and the light level expressed by the CMOS  
sensor and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring.  
1
Select [D-Range Setting] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [D-Range Setting] screen appears.  
6
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Highlight  
Correction].  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
D-Range Setting  
to select O or P.  
Highlight Correction  
Shadow Correction  
MENU  
4
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shadow  
Correction].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select off, low,  
medium or high.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
200  
When [Highlight Correction] is set to [O] (On), the minimum sensitivity is ISO  
200.  
HDR Capture  
Enables the capture of images at high dynamic range. Takes three frames  
(underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and overexposed) to create a  
single composite image with them.  
1
Select [HDR Capture] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Off], [Standard], or  
[Strong].  
1
2
4
3
Program Line  
Extended Bracketing  
HDR Capture  
OFF  
Off  
Digital Filter  
Standard  
Strong  
Multi-exposure  
Interval Shooting  
Composition Adjust.  
6
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• When HDR Capture is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot  
be changed. You cannot use HDR Capture when the file format is set to  
[RAW].  
• When HDR Capture is set, Interval Shooting and Multi-exposure are not  
available. Also, the drive modes other than 9 (Single Frame Shooting) and  
h (Remote Control) are not available.  
• HDR Capture, Extended Bracketing and Digital Filter cannot be used at the  
same time. The mode set last is used.  
• HDR Capture is not available when the exposure mode is set to p (Bulb) or  
M(Flash X-sync Speed) mode.  
• During HDR Capture, multiple frames are combined together to create a  
single image, so it takes time to save an image.  
• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being  
saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.  
• [Shake Reduction] is automatically set to l (Off) when HDR Capture is  
set. In this case, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
201  
Lens Correction  
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to  
lens properties.  
 Distortion  
Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears  
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched  
(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a  
zoom lens or a lens with a small aperture, and straight walls or the  
horizon in the image appears curved.  
6
Pincushion distortion  
Barrel distortion  
 Lateral chromatic aberration  
Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which the  
magnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengths  
of light) when a picture is taken, and may cause a blurred image.  
Chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
202  
• Corrections can only be made when using a DA, DA L or D FA lens. [Lens  
Correction] cannot be selected when an incompatible lens is attached.  
• [Distortion Correction] is disabled when using a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm.  
• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as a  
close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and the  
lens.  
• The shooting speed for continuous shooting may be slower when [Lens  
Correction] is set to O (On).  
• The effects of Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in some  
cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.  
1
Select [Lens Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Lens Correction] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Distortion  
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj].  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
Lens Correction  
6
to select O or P.  
Distortion Correction  
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj  
MENU  
4
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or  
[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you  
can select on or off when developing RAW images. (p.250)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
Adjusting the Composition  
Adjusts the Shake Reduction unit in the X-Y direction or rotation direction  
for a better composition position and a more level camera. Use this when  
you want to adjust the composition, such as when using a tripod.  
1
Select [Composition Adjust.] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The screen for adjusting the composition appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
Composition Adjust.  
to select [Start Adjustment] and  
Please note: depending on the  
press the 4 button.  
lens, adjusting the composition  
may cause vignetting  
Live View is displayed and the  
composition can be adjusted.  
Start Adjustment  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
6
3
Adjust the composition.  
Adjust the composition ooff  
the image  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Moves the composition up, down, left or right.  
Adjust from approximately -1 mm to +1 mm on  
the image sensor.  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Adjusts the level of the composition. Adjust  
from approximately -1° to +1°.  
| (Green) button  
Resets the adjustment value.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
204  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to normal Live View and is ready to take a picture.  
The saved adjustment value is reset when the Live View is ended.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
Setting the Image Finishing Tone  
(Custom Image)  
You can set the image finishing tone before shooting. Select from the  
following seven modes for [Image Tone]: Bright (default setting), Natural,  
Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted and Monochrome. You can adjust the  
following items for [Image Tone].  
Item  
Settings  
*1  
Saturation  
Sets the color saturation. (Available settings: -4 to +4)  
Sets the color. (Available settings: -4 to +4)  
*1  
Hue  
Changes the brightness of the image. (Available settings: -4  
to +4)  
High/Low Key Adj  
Contrast  
Sets the image contrast. (Available settings: -4 to +4)  
You can also change the setting to Contrast Highlight  
Adjustment or Contrast Shadow Adjustment.  
Sets the sharpness of the image outlines. (Available settings:  
-4 to +4)  
*2  
Sharpness  
Changes the contrast to appear as if a B&W color filter was  
used. Sets the filter color. (Available settings: [None],  
[Green], [Yellow], [Orange], [Red], [Magenta], [Blue], [Cyan],  
[Infrared Filter])  
*3  
6
Filter Effect  
Sets the level for cold tone adjustment (- direction) and warm  
tone adjustment (+ direction). (Available settings: -4 to +4)  
*3  
Toning  
*1 This can be set when any mode other than [Monochrome] is selected.  
*2 You can also change the setting to [Fine Sharpness], which makes image outlines even  
thinner and sharper.  
*3 This can be set when [Monochrome] is selected.  
Custom Image cannot be set when the mode dial is set to B(Green) or C  
(Movie) mode.  
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in Capture mode.  
The Custom Image options screen appears.  
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the  
background.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
206  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to choose the image tone mode.  
Bright  
R
M
B
Y
G
C
AE.L  
F
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose an item.  
Portrait  
R
When [Image Tone] is set to  
M
Y
[Monochrome], you can change the  
settings for [Filter Effect], [Toning],  
[Contrast] and [Sharpness].  
B
G
C
AE.L  
F
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the setting.  
6
The background image changes according to the setting.  
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart. (This  
is not displayed when [Image Tone] is set to [Monochrome].)  
Available operations  
Front e-dial (R)  
Switches between enabling and disabling  
contrast settings.  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Switches between [Sharpness] and [Fine  
Sharpness]. When set to [Fine Sharpness],  
image outlines can be captured with more detail.  
Main switch (|)  
You can use Digital Preview to preview the  
background image with the setting applied. (Not  
available during Live View.)  
L button  
Saves the background image. Select [Save as]  
and press the 4 button. (Not available during  
Live View.)  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
Storing Frequently Used Settings  
By using Afunction, you can store the current camera settings and  
easily retrieve them.  
The following settings can be stored.  
• Exposure Mode  
• File Format  
• Drive Mode  
• RAW File Format  
• D-Range Setting  
• HDR Capture  
• Custom Image  
• Digital Filter  
• Flash Mode/Flash Exposure Comp.  
• White Balance  
• Sensitivity/Sensitivity AUTO Range  
• EV Compensation  
• Program Line  
• Shake Reduction  
• Horizon Correction  
• Lens Correction  
• Color Space  
• Exposure Bracketing  
• Extended Bracketing (Bracketing  
Amount/Type)  
• JPEG Recorded Pixels  
• JPEG Quality  
• [A Custom Setting 1-6]  
menu settings  
6
A function cannot be set when the mode dial is set to B(Green) or C  
(Movie) mode.  
Saving the Settings  
Saves the settings to A.  
1
Make the necessary settings.  
2
Select [USER] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [USER] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
208  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save] and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
USER  
Save  
Check Saved USER Settings  
Reset USER Settings  
The [Save] screen appears.  
MENU  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Save] and press the  
4 button.  
Save  
Saves current settings  
in USER mode  
The settings are saved as A.  
Save  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Checking the Saved USER Settings  
6
1
Select [Check Saved USER Settings] in Step 3 of “Saving  
the Settings” and press the four-way controller (5).  
The current settings saved as Aare displayed.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to navigate the pages.  
Check Saved USER Settings  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2.0x5  
P
ISOAUTO 200-800  
-
D R  
AWB  
G1 A1  
200  
WB  
-
0.5  
BA  
1
+0.5  
JPEG 14M  
AdobeRGB  
OK  
1
2
OK  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the [USER] screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
209  
Using Saved USER Settings  
You can easily retrieve saved settings.  
1
Set the mode dial to A.  
The saved settings are retrieved.  
2
Change the settings as  
necessary.  
1
2
3
4
P
Sv  
Tv  
Av  
TAv  
M
B
Exposure Mode  
File Format  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
ISO AUTO Setting  
D-Range Setting  
Lens Correction  
To change the exposure mode, use  
[Exposure Mode] in the [A Rec. Mode 1]  
menu. This menu appears only when the  
mode dial is set to A.  
X
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
Take a picture.  
6
The settings changed in Step 2 are not saved as A. When the camera is  
turned off, the original saved settings are applied.  
Changing the Settings  
Changes the settings saved as A.  
1
Perform Steps 1 and 2 of “Using Saved USER Settings”.  
2
Perform Steps 2 to 4 of “Saving the Settings” (p.207).  
The settings are changed and saved again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
210  
Resetting to Default Settings  
Resets the settings saved as Ato the default settings.  
1
Select [Reset USER Settings] in Step 3 of “Saving the  
Settings” (p.207) and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Reset USER Settings] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Reset] and press the  
4 button.  
Reset USER Settings  
Returns USER settings to  
default values  
The Asettings return to the default  
values.  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7 Playback Functions  
This chapter describes how to use the various playback  
functions in Playback mode.  
Playback Functions Operation ..........................212  
Enlarging Images ...............................................214  
Displaying Multiple Images ...............................216  
Slideshow ............................................................222  
Rotating Images .................................................225  
Comparing Images .............................................226  
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
212  
Playback Functions Operation  
Perform settings related to playing back images in the playback mode  
palette or [Q Playback] menu.  
For details on how to operate the menus, see “Using the Menus” (p.36).  
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items  
Press the four-way controller (3) in  
Playback mode to display the playback  
mode palette.  
You can display the playback mode palette  
even when the movie is paused.  
Slideshow  
7
Plays a slideshow with  
all captured images  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Item  
Function  
Page  
s
Image Rotation  
Rotates images.  
Changes the color tone of images, adds  
softening and slimming effects, or  
adjusts the brightness.  
*1  
D
Digital Filter  
Changes the number of recorded pixels  
and quality level and saves it as a new  
image.  
*1  
n Resize  
Cuts out only the desired area of the  
picture and saves it as a new image.  
o Cropping  
u Slideshow  
Plays back the images one after another. p.222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
213  
Item  
Function  
Page  
You can copy the white balance setting  
of a captured image and save it as  
Manual White Balance.  
K Save as Manual WB  
*2  
h RAW Development  
p Index  
Converts RAW images to JPEG format. p.247  
Joins a number of images together and  
creates a new image from them.  
g Image Comparison  
Displays two images side-by-side.  
Protects images from being accidentally  
erased.  
Z Protect  
*1  
r
DPOF  
Sets the DPOF settings.  
*1 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.  
*2 This cannot be performed when a JPEG image is displayed.  
Playback Menu Setting Items  
You can perform the following settings in the  
[Q Playback ] menu.  
Press the  
3
button in Playback mode to  
display the [Q  
Playback 1] menu.  
7
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Plays back the images one after another.  
Page  
Slideshow  
You can set how images will be displayed p.222  
in the slideshow.  
Sets whether to display the Bright/Dark  
Area warning in Playback mode and also  
sets the initial magnification when  
Q1  
Playback Display  
Method  
enlarging images.  
Delete All Images  
You can delete all saved images at once. p.230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
214  
Enlarging Images  
Images can be magnified up to 32 times in Playback mode.  
1
Use the four-way controller (45  
to select an image in Playback  
mode.  
)
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
100-0001  
JPEG  
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the  
right (toward y).  
The image enlarges at each click (1.2 times  
to 32 times).  
x20  
7
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2345)  
Moves area to enlarge.  
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)/  
m button  
Enlarges image (up to 32 times)  
Reduces image (up to 1.2 times*)  
Returns to the original size  
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)/  
| (Green) button  
4 button  
Front e-dial (R)  
Retains the magnification and the  
position of the magnification area  
and shows previous/next image  
M button  
Switches information display On/  
Off  
* The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You can  
change this in [Playback Display Method] in [Q Playback 1] menu. (p.215)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
215  
• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during Instant  
Review (p.68), Digital Preview (p.131) or Live View (p.156).  
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of  
0.75 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click  
starts at 1.0 times.  
Setting the Playback Display Method  
You can set whether or not to display the Bright/Dark Area warning in  
Playback mode and set the initial magnification when enlarging images.  
1
Select [Playback Display Method] in the [Q Playback 1]  
menu and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Playback Display Method] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select O or P for [Bright/Dark  
Area].  
Playback Display Method  
Bright/Dark Area  
Quick Zoom  
Off  
7
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quick Zoom].  
Press the four-way controller (5)  
Playback Display Method  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the magnification.  
Bright/Dark Area  
Quick Zoom  
Off  
X2  
Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],  
[×4], [×8], [×16] or [×32].  
X4  
X8  
X16  
X32  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
216  
Displaying Multiple Images  
Multi-image Display Screen  
You can display 4, 9, 16, 36 or 81 images on the monitor at the same time.  
The default setting is [9].  
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the  
left (toward f) in Playback  
mode.  
The multi-image display screen  
appears.  
Frame  
Up to nine thumbnail images will be  
displayed at once.  
7
INFO  
100-0001  
Scroll bar  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
217  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
Moves selection frame  
(2345)  
M button  
Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting] screen. Use  
the four-way controller (45) to select the number of  
images to display at the same time.  
Multi-img Display Setting  
Display Type  
OK  
MENU  
INFO  
Cancel  
OK  
([Display Type] cannot be selected when developing  
multiple RAW images (p.248).)  
i button  
Select the multiple images and press to delete. (p.227)  
2
Press the 4 button.  
A full screen display of the selected  
image appears.  
7
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
JPEG  
Icons such as C and ? are not displayed with thumbnail images for 81-image  
display.  
Displaying Images by Folder  
Images will be grouped and displayed by the folder in which they are saved.  
1
On the multi-image display  
screen, turn the rear e-dial (S)  
again to the left (toward f).  
The folder display screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
218  
2
3
Select the folder you want to  
display.  
12345  
102  
100  
103  
101  
104  
105  
_
100 0105  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2345)  
Moves selection frame.  
i button  
Deletes the selected folder and all  
the images in it. (p.228)  
Press the 4 button.  
The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.  
Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar  
display)  
Images will be grouped and displayed by shooting date.  
7
1
In the multi-image display  
screen, press the M button.  
The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen  
appears.  
Number of images shot in this date  
2
Press the M button again.  
The calendar display screen appears.  
Only dates when pictures were taken  
are displayed.  
2/5  
2009.  
WED  
FRI  
9
23  
25  
28  
MON  
2009.10  
THU  
SUN  
WED  
SAT  
1
4
7
10  
INFO  
Delete  
Shooting date  
Thumbnail  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
219  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (23)  
Selects shooting date.  
Four-way controller (45)  
Selects an image of the selected  
shooting date.  
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y) Displays the selected image. Turn to  
the left (f) to return to calendar  
display.  
M button  
The camera returns to the multi-  
image display screen.  
i button  
Deletes selected images.  
3
Press the 4 button.  
A full screen display of the selected image appears.  
Joining Multiple Images (Index)  
Join a number of saved images together and display them as an index  
print. You can also save the displayed index print as a new image. You can  
select the images to include in the index print and have them randomly-  
arranged.  
7
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index)  
and press the 4 button.  
The [Index] screen appears.  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a layout and press the  
Index  
Layout  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
4 button.  
You can select o (Thumbnail),  
Select  
p (Square), q (Random1),  
Create an image  
r (Random2), s (Random3) or  
p (Bubble).  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
220  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images] and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Index  
to select the number of images  
Layout  
12  
24  
36  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
Select  
and press the 4 button.  
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.  
Create an image  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.]  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
8
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the background color  
Index  
Layout  
12  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
Select  
and press the 4 button.  
You can select a white or black  
background.  
Create an image  
7
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Select] and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
10 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the type of image  
selection and press the 4  
button.  
Index  
Layout  
12  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
Select  
Create an image  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
Picks up images automatically from all of the  
images saved.  
u (All images)  
Individually select the images you want to include in  
the index. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)]  
and selecting the individual images.  
w (Manual)  
Picks up images automatically from the folder  
x (Folder name) selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder] and  
selecting the folder.  
11 Use the four-way controller (23)  
Index  
to select [Create an image] and  
Layout  
12  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
Select  
press the 4 button.  
The index print is created and a  
confirmation screen appears.  
Create an image  
MENU  
12 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save] or [Reshuffle]  
and press the 4 button.  
Save  
Reshuffle  
Cancel  
7
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Save  
The index image is saved as P and C file.  
Reselects the images included in the index and displays a  
new index image. If [Thumbnail] is selected for [Layout],  
this is not displayed.  
Reshuffle  
After the index is saved, the camera returns to Playback mode and the index  
image is displayed.  
• Processing may take a while when creating an index print.  
When the number of saved images is smaller than the number set for [Images],  
empty spaces will appear in [Thumbnail] layout and some images may be  
duplicated in other layouts.  
• The images are positioned in order starting from the smallest file number  
when [Thumbnail] or [Square] is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
Slideshow  
You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card  
successively.  
Setting the Slideshow Display  
Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.  
1
Press the 3 button in Playback mode.  
The [Q Playback 1] menu appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Slideshow]  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the item you want to  
Slideshow starts  
change.  
Start  
7
The following items can be changed.  
Interval  
3sec.  
Screen Effect  
Repeat Playback  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Item  
Interval  
Description  
Setting  
Select the image display  
interval.  
3 (default setting)/5/10/30  
seconds  
Select the transition effect  
when the next image is  
displayed.  
Off (default setting)/Fade/  
Wipe/Stripe  
Screen Effect  
Set whether the slideshow  
will start from the beginning  
after the last image is  
displayed.  
Repeat  
Playback  
P (default setting)/O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
223  
4
1
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to change the setting.  
Start  
Interval  
3sec.  
5sec.  
Screen Effect  
Repeat Playback  
10sec.  
30sec.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Starting the Slideshow  
Select [Start] in Step 3 on p.222  
and press the 4 button.  
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the  
playback mode palette and press  
the 4 button.  
Start  
OK  
The start screen is displayed and  
slideshow begins.  
Available operations  
7
4 button  
Pauses playback. Press again to resume  
playback.  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Four-way controller (3)  
Shows previous image.  
Shows next image.  
Stops playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
224  
2
Stop the slideshow.  
Slideshow ends when one of the following operations is performed  
during playback or when paused.  
- The four-way controller (3) is pressed*1  
- The Q button is pressed*1  
- The 3 button is pressed*1  
- The shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully*2  
- The mode dial is turned*2  
- The = button is pressed*2  
- The main switch is turned to |*2  
*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.  
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.  
For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is  
displayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play a movie during a  
slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After the  
movie has finished playing, the slideshow will resume.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
Rotating Images  
When pictures are taken with Q held vertically, the vertical position  
sensor activates and rotation information is added to the image to enable  
playback with the correct image orientation. You can change the rotation  
information and save the image using the following procedure.  
• The rotation information is not added when [33. Saving Rotation Info] in the  
[A Custom Setting 5] menu (p.87) is set to [Off].  
• During playback, the image is automatically rotated based on the rotation  
information when [34. Auto Image Rotation] in the [A Custom Setting 5]  
menu (p.87) is set to [On].  
1
Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image  
Rotation) and press the 4 button.  
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail  
images are displayed.  
7
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the rotation  
direction and press the 4  
button.  
The image rotation information is saved.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Rotation information cannot be changed for the following cases.  
- Protected images  
- Images without rotation information  
- When [34. Auto Image Rotation] in the [A Custom Setting 5] menu (p.87)  
is set to [Off]  
Images with rotation information are displayed according to the orientation of  
the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
226  
Comparing Images  
You can display two images side-by-side.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select g (Image  
Comparison) and press the 4 button.  
The last image displayed will be displayed twice side-by-side.  
3
Select two images and compare  
them at left and right.  
100-0001  
x20  
100-0001  
x20  
You can perform the following operations  
while comparing the images.  
OK  
MENU  
Available operations  
7
4 button  
Moves the selection frame to right image, both  
images, and left image each time the button is  
pressed.  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Moves area to enlarge. When the selection frame is  
placed on both images, you can manipulate both  
images at the same time.  
| (Green) button  
Returns the enlarge display position to the center.  
Front e-dial (R)  
When the selection frame is placed on the left or  
right image, the previous or next image is displayed.  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Enlarges or reduces the image. When the selection  
frame is placed on both images, you can manipulate  
both images at the same time.  
M button  
Switches information display On/Off.  
i button  
When the selection frame is placed on the left or  
right image, the selected image is deleted.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to the normal playback mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
227  
Deleting Multiple Images  
Deleting Selected Images  
You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.  
Deleted images cannot be restored.  
• Protected images cannot be deleted.  
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.  
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the  
left (toward f) in Playback  
mode.  
The multi-image display screen appears.  
7
2
3
Press the i button.  
The screen to select the images to delete  
is displayed.  
The screen temporarily changes to 36-  
image display when [Multi-img Display  
Setting] (p.217) is set to 81-image  
display.  
INFO  
100-0001  
Select the images to delete.  
OK  
MENU  
Delete  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
228  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
Moves selection frame  
(2345)  
4 button  
Adds O and selects an image. Press again to  
return to P. Protected images (Z) cannot be  
selected.  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Displays a full screen display of the image  
selected with the selection frame. When the  
image is displayed full screen, press the four-  
way controller (45) to display the previous or  
next image.  
4
5
Press the i button.  
The delete confirmation screen appears.  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Select&Delete].  
All selected images will  
be deleted  
Select&Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
6
Press the 4 button.  
The selected images are deleted.  
Deleting a Folder  
You can delete the selected folder and all the images in it.  
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) two  
clicks to the left (toward f) in  
Playback mode.  
The folder display screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
229  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select a folder to  
delete and press the i button.  
12345  
102  
100  
103  
101  
104  
The delete folder confirmation screen  
appears.  
105  
_
100 0105  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Delete].  
_
100 0105  
All images in selected  
folder will be deleted  
Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The folder and all images in it are deleted.  
The confirmation screen appears when  
there are protected images. Use the four-  
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]  
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.  
7
3image(s)  
Protected images are found  
When [Delete All] is selected, protected  
images are also deleted.  
Delete All  
Leave All  
OK  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
Deleting All Images  
You can delete all saved images at once.  
Deleted images cannot be restored.  
1
Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Delete All Images].  
All images are deleted  
from memory  
Delete All Images  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
3
Press the 4 button.  
7
All images are deleted.  
The confirmation screen appears when  
there are protected images. Use the four-  
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]  
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.  
3image(s)  
Protected images are found  
When [Delete All] is selected, protected  
images are also deleted.  
Delete All  
Leave All  
OK  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
231  
Protecting Images from Deletion  
(Protect)  
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.  
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is  
formatted.  
Protecting a Single Image  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
Z (Protect) and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select the Protect setting method is displayed.  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Single Image]  
and press the 4 button.  
7
Single Image  
All Images  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select an image to  
protect.  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
100-0105  
to select [Protect].  
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the protect  
settings.  
Protect  
Unprotect  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
232  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of the  
screen.  
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to protect other images.  
Protecting All Images  
1
Select [All Images] in Step 3 on p.231 and press the 4  
button.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Protect] and press the  
Protects all images  
4 button.  
All images saved on the SD Memory Card  
are protected.  
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the protect  
Protect  
Unprotect  
setting on all of the images.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
233  
Connecting the Camera to AV  
Equipment  
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video IN jack  
or HDMI terminal and play back images.  
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC  
adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) is recommended. (p.47)  
• For AV equipment with multiple video IN jacks, check the operating manual  
of the AV device, and select the video IN jack to which the camera is  
connected.  
• You cannot output composite and HDMI video at the same time.  
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera when connected to an AV  
device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.  
Connecting the Camera to a Video IN Jack  
Use the provided AV cable (I-AVC7) to connect the camera to a device  
with a video IN jack.  
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.  
7
2
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the provided  
AV cable toward the 2 mark on the camera, and connect  
the cable to the PC/AV terminal.  
3
Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video IN jack  
on the AV device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
234  
4
Turn the AV device and camera on.  
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is  
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.  
Even if you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo,  
monaural sound is played back.  
Selecting the Video Output Format  
When the hometown is set with the default setting (p.57), the video output  
format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the country or  
region, images may fail to be played back with the default video output  
format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.  
1
Select [Video Out] in the [RSet-up 2] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [NTSC] or [PAL].  
1
2
3
4
Brightness Level  
0
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
NTSC  
PAL  
7
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
File Name  
MSC  
Date  
IMGP  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The video output format is set.  
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting  
the Time] in the World Time setting (p.258) to X (Destination), the video output  
setting changes to the video output format for that city.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
235  
Connecting the Camera to an HDMI Terminal  
Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a  
device with an HDMI terminal.  
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.  
2
Open the terminal cover and connect the HDMI cable to  
the HDMI terminal.  
Çì  
3
4
Connect the other end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN  
jack on the AV device.  
7
Turn the AV device and camera on.  
The camera turns on in HDMI mode, and the camera information is  
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.  
• The camera has a Type C (Mini) HDMI terminal. Use a commercially  
available HDMI cable that matches your AV device.  
• Nothing is displayed on the camera monitor during HDMI output.  
• If you used an external microphone to record movie sound in stereo, the  
sound is played back in stereo.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
236  
Selecting the HDMI Output Format  
Set the output signal format of the HDMI terminal.  
1
Select [HDMI Out] in the [RSet-up 2] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the HDMI output  
1
2
3
4
Brightness Level  
0
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
File Name  
format.  
NTSC  
Auto  
1080i  
720p  
The maximum size  
corresponding the AV device  
and camera is automatically  
selected. (default setting)  
480p  
Auto  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
1080i  
720p  
1920×1080i  
1280×720p  
720×480p  
*1  
480p  
*1 When [480p] is selected, HDMI output format switches between 480p [NTSC] and  
576p (720×576p) [PAL] depending on the video output format setting.  
7
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The HDMI output format is set.  
• When the HDMI output format is set to [1080i] or [720p], the display may  
appear with a screen design that differs from that displayed on the camera.  
• The Bright/Dark Area warning is not displayed during Live View.  
• When the exposure mode is set to C (Movie), the output format is fixed to  
[480p] regardless of the HDMI output format setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8 Processing Images  
This chapter describes how to process pictures taken and  
edit RAW images.  
Changing the Image Size ...................................238  
Developing RAW Images ...................................247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
238  
Changing the Image Size  
Changes the number of recorded pixels and saves it as a new image.  
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and  
Quality Level (Resize)  
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level and saves it as a  
new image. The number of recorded pixels can be reduced while still  
obtaining an image with good quality.  
• Only JPEG files captured with this camera can be resized.  
• You cannot select a larger resolution than that of the original image.  
• Images resized to m with this camera cannot be resized.  
1
Select an image to resize in Playback mode.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
n (Resize) and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.  
8
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select a size.  
You can select one size smaller than that  
of the original image. The selectable size  
differs according to the original image  
14M  
10M  
size and aspect ratio.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
5
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way  
controller (45) to select the quality level.  
You can select Z, C, D or E.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
239  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Save as].  
Saves tthe imagge as a nneew file  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The resized image is saved as a new image.  
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)  
Cuts out only the desired area of the picture and saves it as a new image.  
The aspect ratio can also be changed.  
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be cropped.  
• Images resized to j or m with this camera cannot be cropped.  
8
1
Select an image to crop in Playback mode.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
o (Cropping) and press the 4 button.  
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop  
appears on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
240  
4
Specify the size and position of  
the area to crop by using  
cropping frame.  
MENU  
OK  
INFO  
3:2  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Changes the size of the cropping frame.  
Moves the cropping frame.  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
M button  
Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2], [4:3],  
[16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be rotated  
from -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.  
3:2  
0°  
Aspect Ratio  
Image Rotation  
MENU  
| (Green) button  
Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.  
| appears only when the size of the cropping  
frame can be rotated.  
8
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save as].  
Saves tthe imagge as a nneew file  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The cropped image is saved as a new image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
Processing Images with Digital  
Filters  
You can edit captured images using digital filters. A processed image is  
saved as a new image with a size of W and a quality level of C.  
The following filters are available.  
Filter name  
Effect  
Parameter  
Shading Level: +1/+2/+3  
Creates an image that  
Toy Camera looks as though it was Blur: +1/+2/+3  
shot with a toy camera.  
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow  
Toning: -3 to +3  
Creates an image with  
the look of an old photo.  
Retro  
Frame Composite: None/Thin/Medium/  
Thick  
Enhances the contrast  
in the image.  
High Contrast  
+1 to +5  
Extracts a specific color Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/  
and shoots the rest of Yellow  
Extract Color  
Soft  
the image in black and  
Color Freq. Range: -2 to +2  
white.  
Creates an image with Soft Focus: +1/+2/+3  
a soft focus throughout  
Shadow Blur: On/Off  
the image.  
For taking pictures of  
night scenes or lights  
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large  
8
reflected on water with  
a special sparkling look Size: Short/Medium/Long  
achieved by adding  
cross-like effects to the  
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°  
picture’s highlights.  
Star Burst  
Fish-eye  
Creates an image that  
looks as though it was  
Weak/Medium/Strong  
shot with a fish-eye  
lens.  
Creates amonochrome Filter Effect: B&W/Red/Green/Blue  
Monochrome image such as a black-  
and-white photo.  
Toning (B-A): 7 levels  
Adds a color filter to the Color: Red/Magenta/Cyan/Blue/Green/  
image. Select from 18 Yellow  
Color  
filters (6 colors × 3  
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark  
tones).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
242  
Filter name  
Water Color  
Effect  
Parameter  
Creates an image that Intensity: Weak/Standard/Strong  
looks as though it was  
Saturation: Low/Medium/High  
painted.  
Creates an image that  
looks as though it was Weak/Standard/Strong  
drawn with a crayon.  
Pastel  
Slim  
Changes the horizontal  
and vertical ratio of  
images.  
±8 levels  
Blurs part of the image  
to create a fake  
miniature scene.  
Miniature  
HDR  
Front/Middle/Back  
Weak/Standard/Strong  
Creates an image that  
looks like a high  
dynamic range image.  
Brightness: ±8 levels  
Saturation: ±3 levels  
Hue: ±3 levels  
Base  
Parameter  
Adj  
Adjusts the parameters  
to create the desired  
image.  
Contrast: ±3 levels  
Sharpness: ±3 levels  
High Contrast: Off/+1 to +5  
Soft Focus: Off/+1/+2/+3  
Tone Break: Off/Red/Green/Blue/  
Yellow  
8
Customize and save a  
Custom Filter filter to your own  
Shading Type: 6 types  
Shading Level: -3 to +3  
Invert Color: Off/On  
preferences.  
Distortion Type: 3 types  
Distortion Level: Off/Weak/Medium/  
Strong  
Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be edited using the  
Digital Filters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
243  
Applying the Digital Filter  
1
Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback  
mode.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital  
Filter) and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select the filter appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select a filter and  
100-0001  
Toy Camera  
press the 4 button.  
After selecting a filter, you can check the  
effects on the screen.  
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to  
select a different image.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the parameter  
and the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.  
8
100-0001  
100-0001  
Color  
Slim  
OK  
OK  
MENU  
MENU  
Color Filter  
Slim Filter  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
244  
7
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Uses filters in  
combination] or [Save as].  
Continue selecting filters  
Select [Uses filters in combination] when  
you want to apply additional filters to the  
same image.  
Uses filters in combination  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
8
Press the 4 button.  
If [Uses filters in combination] was selected, the camera will return to  
Step 4.  
If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image will be saved as a new  
image.  
Up to 20 filters, including digital filters during shooting (p.153), can be  
combined to the same image.  
Recreating Filter Effects  
Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and apply the same  
filter effects to other images.  
8
1
Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.  
Select [Digital Filter] in the playback mode palette.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Recreating filter  
effects] and press the 4  
Applying the digital filter  
Recreating filter effects  
button.  
Searching for the original image  
The history of the filter set for the  
selected image appears.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
245  
4
To check the parameter details,  
press the M button.  
You can check the filter parameters.  
100-0001  
Reappliies folllowing digital filter  
effectts from ppreviouus image  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
17. - -  
18. - -  
19. - -  
20. - -  
OK  
MENU  
INFO  
Details  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The image selection screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select an image for  
applying the same filter effects  
and press the 4 button.  
100-0001  
Performs ddigital filter  
processinng to this image  
You can only select an image that has not  
been processed with a filter.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save as] and press the  
4 button.  
Saves the image as a new file  
8
The filter-processed image will be saved  
as a new image.  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
Searching for the Original Image  
Searches for and displays the original image prior to digital filter  
application.  
1
Select [Searching for the original  
image] in Step 3 on p.244 and  
press the 4 button.  
Applying the digital filter  
Recreating filter effects  
The original image prior to digital filter  
application is retrieved.  
Searching for the original image  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message  
[Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
247  
Developing RAW Images  
You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG or TIFF files.  
Only RAW files captured with this camera can be edited. RAW files and JPEG  
files captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.  
Developing One RAW Image  
1
Select a RAW image in Playback mode.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW  
Development) and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select the development method is displayed.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Developing  
JPEG  
Single Image] and press the 4  
button.  
8
Developing Single Image  
Developing Selected Images  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
The parameters recorded in the image  
file appear.  
14M  
RAW  
JPEG  
File Foormat  
You can turn the front e-dial (R) to  
select a different image.  
To specify the parameters before  
sRGB  
OK  
MENU  
100-0001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
248  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
RAW JPEG  
Saves the image as a new file  
The RAW image is developed and saved  
as a new image.  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Exit] and press  
the 4 button.  
Image developed and stored.  
Continue developing?  
Select [Continue] to edit other images.  
Continue  
Exit  
OK  
OK  
Developing Multiple RAW Images  
You can develop multiple RAW images using the same settings.  
8
1
Select [Developing Selected Images] in Step 4 on p.247  
and press the 4 button.  
The multi-image display screen appears.  
Refer to p.216 for operations in the multi-image display screen.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the RAW  
images to be developed and press the 4 button.  
Press the L button.  
The development confirmation screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
249  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Develop images as  
shot] or [Develop images with  
modified settings].  
Develop images as shot  
Develop images with  
modified settings  
To change the parameters, select  
[Develop images with modified settings].  
For details, see “Specifying the  
Parameters” (p.250).  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
The screen to select the parameter appears.  
Set [File Format], [Recorded  
Pixels] and [Quality Level].  
JPEG  
File Format  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
14M  
You can select [JPEG] or [TIFF] for the  
file format. If [TIFF] is selected, the  
[Recorded Pixels] and [Quality Level]  
settings are not available.  
sRGB  
OK  
MENU  
100-0001  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
RAW JPEG  
Saves the image as a new file  
8
The selected RAW images are  
developed and saved as new images.  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
Specifying the Parameters  
Specify the parameters for developing RAW images.  
The following parameters can be changed.  
Parameter  
File Format  
Value  
Page  
JPEG/TIFF  
W (4672×3104)/J(3936×2624)/  
P (3072×2048)/i (1728×1152)  
*1  
Recorded Pixels  
Z(Premium) / C (Best) / D  
(Better) / E (Good)  
*1  
Quality Level  
Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/Vibrant/  
Muted/Monochrome  
Custom Image  
F (Auto), G (Daylight), H (Shade),  
^ (Cloudy), JD (Fluorescent Light Daylight  
Color), JN (Fluorescent Light Daylight  
*2  
White Balance  
White), JW (Fluorescent Light Cool White), p.191  
JL (Fluorescent Light Warm White),  
I (Tungsten Light), L (Flash), f,  
K (Manual), K (Color Temperature)  
Sensitivity  
-2.0 to +2.0  
High-ISO Noise  
Reduction  
Off/Low/Medium/High  
Shadow Correction  
Distortion Correction  
Off/Low/Medium/High  
Off/On  
*3  
*3  
8
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj  
Color Space  
Off/On  
sRGB/AdobeRGB  
*1 This cannot be set when [File Format] is set to [TIFF]. (The setting is fixed to W.)  
*2 This cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.  
*3 This can be selected only when a compatible lens is attached. (p.201)  
1
Press the four-way controller  
(23) in Step 4 on p.247 to  
choose the parameter you want  
to change.  
14M  
RAW  
JPEG  
File Foormat  
sRGB  
OK  
MENU  
100-0001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
251  
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.  
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the setting screen for White  
Balance and Custom Image.  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.  
• You cannot save the background image or use Digital Preview with White  
Balance/Custom Image.  
• When the white balance is set to K (Manual), press the m button to display  
the measuring screen.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252  
Readjusting Images Shot in JPEG  
Format  
You can readjust Custom Image and White Balance for images shot in  
JPEG format immediately after shooting them without deteriorating image  
quality.  
1
Set the file format to [JPEG] and shoot an image.  
Refer to p.188 for setting File Format.  
2
Press the four-way controller (4) to change White  
Balance, or press the four-way controller (5) to change  
Custom Image.  
The [White Balance] or [Custom Image] screen appears.  
3
Set White Balance or Custom Image as desired.  
Custom Image or White Balance can be set using the same procedures  
as before shooting.  
Refer to p.191 for setting White Balance and p.205 for setting Custom  
Image.  
4
5
Press the L button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
8
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
The image with the White Balance or Custom Image setting is saved as  
a new image.  
The image can be readjusted only right after being shot. Adjustments cannot  
be made after new images are shot or the camera is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 Changing Additional  
Settings  
This chapter describes how to change additional settings.  
Language ............................................................257  
Convention ..........................................................267  
Setting the Power Setting ..................................270  
Setting the DPOF Settings .................................273  
Setting USB Connection Mode .........................275  
Exif .......................................................................277  
Setting the Color Space......................................279  
(Pixel Mapping) ...................................................280  
..............................................................................281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
254  
How to Operate the Set-up Menu  
Perform various settings related to the camera in the [R Set-up] menu.  
Refer to “Using the Menus” (p.36) for details on menu operations.  
Set-up Menu Setting Items  
Perform the following settings in the [RSet-up 1-4] menu.  
Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way  
controller (45) to display the [RSet-up 1-4] menu.  
Menu  
Item  
Language/  
Function  
Page  
Changes the language in which menus  
and messages appear.  
Date Adjustment  
Sets the date format and time.  
Sets display of local date and time of a  
specified city in addition to the present  
location on the monitor when traveling  
overseas.  
World Time  
R1  
Sets the size of the text selected in the  
menus.  
Text Size  
Sets to display indicators on the  
monitor.  
Guide Display  
Beep  
Switches the beep tone on/off.  
9
Brightness Level  
LCD Color Tuning  
Changes the brightness of the monitor. p.264  
Adjusts the color of the monitor.  
Sets the output format when connecting  
to an AV device with a video jack.  
Video Out  
Sets the HDMI output format when  
connecting to an AV device with an  
HDMI terminal.  
HDMI Out  
R2  
Sets the USB connection mode when  
connecting to a computer.  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
File Name  
Sets the method used to assign folder  
names for storing images.  
Sets the method used to assign file  
names for images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
255  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Sets the photographer and copyright  
information embedded to Exif.  
Copyright Information  
Auto Power Off  
Sets the time to turn off automatically.  
R3  
Sets the battery to use when the  
optional battery grip (D-BG4) is  
attached.  
Select Battery  
Reset  
Resets all settings.  
Maps out and corrects for any defective  
pixels in the CMOS sensor.  
Pixel Mapping  
Detects dust adhering to the CMOS  
sensor.  
Dust Alert  
R4  
Cleans the CMOS sensor using  
ultrasonic vibrations.  
Dust Removal  
Locks the mirror in the up position for  
cleaning the CMOS sensor.  
Sensor Cleaning  
Format  
Formats the SD Memory Card.  
 [RSet-up 1] menu  
 [R Set-up 2] menu  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
English  
Brightness Level  
0
Date Adjustment  
World Time  
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
File Name  
NTSC  
Auto  
MSC  
Date  
IMGP  
Standard  
3sec.  
Guide Display  
Beep  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
9
 [RSet-up 3] menu  
 [R Set-up 4] menu  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Copyright Information  
Auto Power Off  
Select Battery  
Reset  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Alert  
Dust Removal  
Sensor Cleaning  
Format  
1min.  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
256  
Formatting the SD Memory Card  
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused  
or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.  
Formatting will delete all the data on the SD Memory Card.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be  
damaged and become unusable.  
• Note that formatting will delete all data, either protected or unprotected.  
1
Select [Format] in the [RSet-up 4] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Format] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Format].  
Format  
All data deleted  
Format  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
3
Press the 4 button.  
Formatting starts.  
When formatting is completed, the  
screen that was displayed before  
selecting the menu appears again.  
Formatting  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
257  
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and  
Display Language  
Setting the Beep  
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off.  
There are five items that you can set: In-focus, AE lock, | button  
operation sound, self-timer and remote control.  
The default setting is all O (On).  
1
Select [Beep] in the [RSet-up 1] menu and press the four-  
way controller (5).  
The [Beep] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select an item and use  
Beep  
Setting  
the four-way controller (45) to  
In-focus  
select O or P.  
AE-L  
RAW  
You can turn all the beeps off by selecting  
Self-timer  
Remote Control  
Z for [Setting].  
MENU  
3
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
258  
Changing the Date Display  
You can change the initial date and time settings. You can also set the  
display style. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd].  
Choose [12h] (12 hour) or [24h] (24 hour) for time display method.  
Set in [Date Adjustment] in the [RSet-up 1]  
menu (p.254).  
Date Adjustment  
24h  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
Setting the World Time  
The date and time set in “Initial Settings” (p.57) serve as the date and time  
of your present location.  
Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local  
date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.  
1
Select [World Time] in the [RSet-up 1] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [World Time] screen appears.  
9
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select X (Destination) or W  
World Time  
Setting the Time  
(Hometown) for [Setting the  
Destination  
:
Time].  
16 00  
London  
Hometown  
New York  
This setting changes the date and time on  
the guide display screen.  
:
10 00  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
259  
3
4
5
Press the four-way controller (23).  
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Destination] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select a destination city.  
Destination  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the  
map.  
The location, time difference and current  
time of the selected city appears.  
London  
DST  
+06:00  
16:00  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [DST].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
Select O (On) if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).  
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
The destination setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
9
• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.260) for cities that can be specified as  
a destination.  
• Select W (Hometown) in Step 2 to select the city and DST setting.  
X appears in the guide display and status screen if [Setting the Time] is set  
to X (Destination). (p.22)  
• When you set [Setting the Time] to X (Destination), the video output (p.234)  
setting changes to the default setting for that city.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
260  
List of World Time Cities  
City  
City  
Region  
North  
America  
Region  
Honolulu  
Dakar  
Africa/West  
Asia  
Anchorage  
Vancouver  
San Francisco  
Los Angeles  
Calgary  
Algiers  
Johannesburg  
Istanbul  
Cairo  
Jerusalem  
Nairobi  
Denver  
Chicago  
Miami  
Jeddah  
Tehran  
Toronto  
Dubai  
New York  
Halifax  
Karachi  
Kabul  
Mexico City  
Lima  
Male  
Central and  
South  
America  
Delhi  
Santiago  
Caracas  
Buenos Aires  
Sao Paulo  
Rio de Janeiro  
Lisbon  
Colombo  
Kathmandu  
Dacca  
Yangon  
Bangkok  
Kuala Lumpur  
Vientiane  
Singapore  
Phnom Penh  
Ho chi Minh  
Jakarta  
East Asia  
Europe  
Madrid  
London  
Paris  
Amsterdam  
Milan  
9
Rome  
Hong Kong  
Beijing  
Copenhagen  
Berlin  
Shanghai  
Manila  
Prague  
Stockholm  
Budapest  
Warsaw  
Athens  
Taipei  
Seoul  
Tokyo  
Guam  
Helsinki  
Moscow  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
261  
City  
Region  
Oceania  
Perth  
Adelaide  
Sydney  
Noumea  
Wellington  
Auckland  
Pago Pago  
Setting the Display Language  
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.  
are displayed.  
You can choose from 20 languages: English, French, German, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,  
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Chinese (Traditional/  
Simplified) and Japanese.  
menu (p.254).  
] in the [RSet-up 1]  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
262  
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu  
Display  
Setting the Text Size  
You can set the size of the text selected in the menus to [Standard]  
(normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).  
Set in [Text Size] in the [RSet-up 1] menu  
1
2
3
4
(p.254).  
English  
Date Adjustment  
World Time  
Text Size  
Guide Display  
Beep  
Standard  
Large  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Setting the Guide Display Time  
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when  
the camera is turned on or the Capture mode is changed. (p.22)  
Select from [3sec.] (default setting), [10sec.], [30sec.] and [Off].  
Set in [Guide Display] in the [RSet-up 1]  
1
2
3
4
menu (p.254).  
English  
Date Adjustment  
World Time  
Text Size  
Guide Display  
Beep  
3sec.  
10sec.  
30sec.  
Off  
9
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Setting the Status Screen Display  
You can set whether to display the status screen on the monitor and set  
the display color of the status screen, control panel and playback mode  
palette.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
263  
1
Select [Status Screen] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Status Screen] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
O: Displays status screen (default setting).  
P : Does not display status screen.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Display Color].  
Usethefour-waycontroller(45)  
Status Screen  
to select from the six display  
colors.  
Status Screen  
Display Color  
1
1/125  
5.6  
F
MENU  
5
Press the 3 button twice.  
The status screen display and display color settings are changed.  
Setting the Display for Instant Review  
You can set the Instant Review display time and whether or not to display  
the histogram and Bright/Dark Area warning. The default settings are  
[1sec.] for the [Display Time] and [Off] for [Histogram] and [Bright/Dark  
Area].  
9
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Instant Review] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
264  
2
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the display time  
for [Instant Review].  
Instant Review  
Display Time  
Histogram  
1sec.  
3sec.  
5sec.  
Off  
Bright/Dark Area  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Histogram] or  
[Bright/Dark Area].  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor  
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust settings when the  
monitor is hard to see.  
1
Select [Brightness Level] in the [RSet-up 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
9
The [Brightness Level] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to adjust the brightness.  
Brightness Level  
0
You can adjust the value from the 15  
levels.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
Press the 4 button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
265  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor  
You can adjust the color of the monitor.  
1
Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [RSet-up 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.  
2
Adjust the color.  
LCD Color Tuning  
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available  
on the G-M and B-A axes.  
G
B
A
M
0
0
OK  
MENU  
0
Cancel  
OK  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (23)  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between  
green (G) and magenta (M).  
Four-way controller (45)  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between  
blue (B) and amber (A).  
| (Green) button  
Resets the adjustment value.  
9
Front e-dial (R)  
Displays a saved image in the background  
so you can adjust the color while viewing  
the image. This is useful for matching the  
color of the monitor with that of a computer.  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
266  
Setting the Electronic Level Display  
This camera is equipped with an electronic level for detecting whether the  
camera is level, as indicated on the bar graph in the viewfinder and on the  
LCD panel. Select whether to display the bar graph.  
1
Select [Electronic Level] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select O or P.  
1
2
3
4
Movie  
Live View  
Status Screen  
Digital Preview  
Instant Review  
Electronic Level  
Horizon Correction  
O: Displays the bar graph of the  
electronic level  
P : Does not display the bar graph of  
the electronic level (default  
setting)  
MENU  
Exit  
3
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
The bar graph is also displayed on the LCD panel during Live View. (p.159)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
267  
Setting the Folder Name/File Number  
Naming Convention  
Selecting the Folder Name  
You can select a method for assigning the folder names for storing  
images.  
The two digits of the [month] and [day] on which the picture was taken  
are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is a  
sequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day) appears  
according to the date format set in [Date Adjustment] (p.258). (default  
Date  
setting)  
Example: 101_0125: for folders with pictures taken on January 25th  
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].  
Example: 101PENTX  
PENTX  
Set in [Folder Name] in the [RSet-up 2]  
1
2
3
4
menu (p.254).  
Brightness Level  
0
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
File Name  
NTSC  
Auto  
MSC  
Date  
PENTX  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Selecting the File Number Setting  
9
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when  
saved to a new folder. Select O or P for [File No.] in [Memory] (p.281) in  
the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.  
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved  
and subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a  
new folder is created.  
O
P
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001 each  
time a new folder is created for saving images.  
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are  
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Auto Bracket shooting,  
images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed, even if the  
number of images exceeds 500.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
268  
Setting the File Name  
You can change the file names of images.  
The default naming conventions for the color space (p.279) settings are as  
follows.  
[xxxx] indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential  
number. (p.267)  
Color Space  
sRGB  
File Name  
IMGPxxxx.JPG  
_IGPxxxx.JPG  
AdobeRGB  
For sRGB, you can change [IMGP] (4 characters) to the desired  
characters.  
For AdobeRGB, of the 4 characters you selected, the first 3 are assigned  
in place of [IGP].  
Example: When set to [ABCDxxxx.JPG], files are named  
[_ABCxxxx.JPG] for AdobeRGB  
1
Select [File Name] in the [RSet-up 2] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [File Name] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Change] and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
File Name  
I
M G P xxxx.jpg  
G P xxxx.jpg  
s
RGB  
_
I
AdobeRGB  
9
The text-entry screen appears.  
Change  
Reset File Name  
MENU  
3
Change the text.  
File Name  
Textselection  
cursor  
Finish  
Text input  
cursor  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Enter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
269  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Moves text input cursor.  
Four-way controller  
Moves text selection cursor.  
(2345)  
4 button  
Enters a character selected with the text selection  
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.  
4
5
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to  
[Finish] and press the 4 button.  
The file name is changed.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Resetting the File Name  
You can reset a changed file name to its default setting.  
1
Select [Reset File Name] in Step 2 on p.268 and press the  
4 button.  
The file name is reset.  
2
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270  
Setting the Power Setting  
Setting Auto Power Off  
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain  
length of time. Select from [1min.] (default setting), [3min.], [5min.],  
[10min.], [30min.] or [Off].  
Set in [Auto Power Off] in the [RSet-up 3]  
1
2
3
4
menu (p.255).  
Copyright Information  
Auto Power Off  
Select Battery  
Reset  
1min.  
3min.  
5min.  
10min.  
30min.  
Off  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.  
- The Live View is displayed  
- The slideshow is played back  
- The camera is connected to a computer with the USB cable  
Selecting a Battery  
You can set the battery priority to the camera or the battery grip when the  
optional battery grip D-BG4 (p.299) is attached.  
9
1
Select [Select Battery] in the [RSet-up 3] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Select Battery] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
271  
2
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Select Battery  
Auto Select  
MENU  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select an item.  
Select Battery  
Auto Select  
Body First  
Grip First  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Priority is given to the battery with the most remaining  
power. (default setting)  
Auto Select  
Body First/  
Grip First  
Priority is given to the selected battery.  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
When using AA batteries in the  
battery grip, use the four-way  
controller (23) to select [AA  
Battery Type] and press the four-  
way controller (5).  
Select Battery  
Auto Select  
AA Battery Type  
AUTO  
9
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272  
6
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the AA battery type.  
Select Battery  
AUTO  
AA Battery Type  
AUTO  
Auto-detect  
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will  
detect automatically the type of battery  
used.  
Ni-MH  
AL  
Nickel-Metal Hydride  
Alkaline  
Li  
Lithium  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
7
Press the 4 button.  
8
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
• If batteries are inserted into both the body and grip, the battery levels of both  
are checked when the power is turned on. Regardless of the [Select Battery]  
setting, both batteries are slightly used.  
• When the currently selected battery runs out as a result of the check, [Battery  
depleted] appears on the monitor. Turn the camera off and on again, and the  
camera will switch to the remaining battery.  
• You can check the battery usage condition on the status screen and LCD  
panel. (p.46)  
When the type of AA batteries inserted in the battery grip differs from the  
battery type setting in Step 6, the battery level will not be correctly determined.  
Please set the correct battery type. Usually, there is no problem using  
[Auto-detect]. However, when using batteries at low temperature, or when  
using batteries that were stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate  
battery type so the camera can correctly determine the remaining battery level.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
273  
Setting the DPOF Settings  
You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory  
Card with recorded images to a store for printing.  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the  
number of copies and whether to imprint the date.  
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images.  
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF)  
and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.  
3
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Single Image] or [All  
Images] and press the 4  
Single Image  
button.  
All Images  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
9
When [Single Image] is selected  
in Step 3, use the four-way  
controller (45) to select an  
image to set DPOF settings.  
100-0105  
Copies  
00  
Date  
OK  
MENU  
Date  
OK  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of  
copies.  
You can print up to 99 copies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
274  
6
7
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to  
select O or P for printing the  
date.  
100-0105  
O: The date will be printed.  
P : The date will not be printed.  
Copies  
00  
Date  
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to set other images  
(up to 999).  
OK  
MENU  
Date  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The DPOF setting for the selected image is saved and the camera  
returns to Playback mode.  
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,  
the date may not be printed on the pictures even if the DPOF setting is set to  
O.  
• The number of copies specified in settings for all images applies to all the  
images and the settings for single images are canceled. Before printing,  
check that the number is correct.  
To cancel DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00] in Step 5 and press  
the 4 button.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
275  
Setting USB Connection Mode  
Set the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer via the  
provided USB cable (I-USB7). The default setting is [MSC].  
1
Select [USB Connection] in the [RSet-up 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [MSC] or [PTP].  
1
2
4
3
Brightness Level  
0
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
HDMI Out  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
File Name  
NTSC  
Auto  
MSC  
PTP  
IMGP  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is changed.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
276  
MSC and PTP  
MSC (Mass Storage Class)  
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to  
the computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard  
for controlling USB devices with this driver.  
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage  
Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without  
installing a dedicated driver.  
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)  
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital  
cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.  
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP  
without installing a device driver.  
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the Q  
to your computer.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
277  
Setting the Photographer Information  
Saved to Exif  
The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are  
automatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You  
can embed photographer information in this Exif.  
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to check the Exif  
information.  
1
Select [Copyright Information] in the [RSet-up 3] menu  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select O or P.  
Copyright Information  
Embed Copyright Data  
O: Embeds copyright information in  
Photographer  
the Exif.  
Copyright Holder  
P : Does not embed copyright  
information in the Exif. (default  
setting)  
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Photographer]  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The text-entry screen appears.  
9
Enter the text.  
Photographer  
Textselection  
cursor  
Finish  
Text input  
cursor  
Delete One Character  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Enter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
278  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Moves text input cursor.  
Four-way controller  
Moves text selection cursor.  
(2345)  
| (Green) button  
Switches between upper and lower case letters.  
4 button  
Enters a character selected with the text  
selection cursor at the position of the text input  
cursor.  
i button  
Deletes a character at the position of the text  
input cursor.  
5
After entering the text, move the  
text selection cursor to [Finish]  
and press the 4 button.  
Copyright Information  
Embed Copyright Data  
Photographer  
AAAA  
The camera returns to the [Copyright  
Information] screen.  
Copyright Holder  
MENU  
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Copyright  
Holder] and enter the text in the same way as  
[Photographer].  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
279  
Setting the Color Space  
You can set the color space to use.  
sRGB  
Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)  
AdobeRGB Sets to AdobeRGB color space.  
Set in [Color Space] in the [A Rec. Mode 4]  
1
2
3
4
menu (p.84).  
Color Space  
RAW File Format  
RAW Button  
Memory  
sRGB  
AdobeRGB  
USER  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focal Length  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
File names differ depending on the color space setting as shown below.  
For sRGB : IMGPxxxx.JPG  
For AdobeRGB : _IGPxxxx.JPG  
“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential  
number. (p.267)  
Color Space  
Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital  
cameras, monitors, and printers, differ. This color range is called the  
Color Space.  
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color  
spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and  
AdobeRGB.  
9
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a computer.  
AdobeRGB covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for  
occupational uses such as industrial printing.  
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image  
created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
280  
Correcting Defective Pixels in the  
CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)  
Pixel mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting for defective  
pixels in the CMOS sensor.  
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [RSet-up 4] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Pixel Mapping] and  
press the 4 button.  
Pixel Mapping  
Checks the image sensor  
and then adjust  
Defective pixels are mapped and  
corrected, and the screen that was  
displayed before selecting the menu  
Pixel Mapping  
Cancel  
appears again.  
OK  
OK  
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to activate  
Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit K-AC50  
(optional) or change the battery with ample power remaining.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
281  
Selecting Settings to Save in the  
Camera (Memory)  
You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned  
off. The following function settings can be saved.  
• Flash Mode  
• Extended Bracketing  
• HDR Capture  
• Digital Filter  
• Drive Mode  
• White Balance  
• Sensitivity  
• Playback Display  
• File number  
• EV Compensation  
• Flash Exposure Compensation  
The default setting is O (On) for all except HDR Capture and Digital Filter.  
[Memory] cannot be selected when the mode dial is set to A.  
1
Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Memory 1] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose an item.  
1
2
Memory  
Flash Mode  
Drive Mode  
White Balance  
Sensitivity  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the  
[Memory 2] screen.  
9
EV Compensation  
Flash Exposure Comp.  
Extended Bracketing  
MENU  
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
O: Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.  
P : Settings are cleared and returned to their default settings when  
the camera is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
282  
4
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
• Set [File No.] to O (On) to continue the sequential numbering for the file  
name even if a new folder is created. See “Selecting the File Number Setting”  
(p.267).  
• When the [R Set-up] menu is reset (p.290), all Memory settings return to the  
default settings.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10Appendix  
Default Settings ..................................................284  
Combinations .....................................................292  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................295  
Optional Accessories .........................................299  
Error Messages ..................................................305  
Troubleshooting .................................................307  
Main Specifications ............................................309  
Glossary ..............................................................314  
Index ....................................................................319  
WARRANTY POLICY ..........................................326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
284  
Default Settings  
The table below lists the factory default settings.  
The functions set in Memory (p.281) are saved even when the camera is  
turned off.  
Reset Setting  
Yes : The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function  
(p.290).  
No : The setting is saved even after reset.  
Direct Keys  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
9 (Single Frame  
Drive Mode  
Flash Mode  
Yes  
Shooting)  
Depends on Capture  
mode  
Yes  
White Balance  
Custom Image  
F (Auto)  
Yes  
Yes  
Bright  
[A Rec. Mode] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
*1  
Exposure Mode  
e (Hyper-program)  
JPEG  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
File Format  
10  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
W (4672×3104)  
C(Best)  
100 - 800  
Sensitivity limit  
ISO AUTO  
Setting  
AUTO ISO  
Parameters  
s (Standard)  
Yes  
Highlight Correction  
Shadow Correction  
Distortion Correction  
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj  
P (Off)  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
D-Range  
Setting  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
Lens  
Correction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
285  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Program Line  
k (Normal)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Type  
Off  
±1  
Extended  
Bracketing  
Bracketing Amount  
HDR Capture  
Digital Filter  
Off  
Not use any filters  
2times  
Number of Shots  
Auto EV Adjustment  
Interval  
Multi-  
exposure  
P (Off)  
1sec.  
Number of Shots  
Start Interval  
Start Time  
2 images  
Now  
Interval  
Shooting  
12:00AM / 00:00  
Center  
X-Y direction  
Rotate  
Composition  
Adjust.  
0°  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
Sound  
X
C(Best)  
O (On)  
Movie  
Movie Aperture  
Control  
Fixed  
Yes  
Shake Reduction  
Info Overlay  
Show Grid  
l(Off)  
O (On)  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Histogram  
Live View  
Bright/Dark Area  
I (Face Detection +  
Autofocus Mode  
Yes  
Contrast AF)  
10  
Status Screen  
Display Color  
Digital Preview  
Histogram  
O (On)  
1
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Status  
Screen  
Off (Optical Preview)  
P (Off)  
Digital  
Preview  
Bright/Dark Area  
Display Time  
Histogram  
P (Off)  
1sec.  
Instant  
Review  
P (Off)  
Bright/Dark Area  
P (Off)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
286  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Electronic Level  
Default Setting  
Page  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
sRGB  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Horizon Correction  
Color Space  
RAW File Format  
PEF  
Cancel after 1 shot  
O (On)  
RAW Button  
JPEG/RAW/RAW+File  
Format  
All RAW+  
Yes  
O (On) for all except  
HDR Capture and  
Digital Filter  
Memory  
USER  
Yes  
*2  
Yes  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focal Length  
k(On)  
35 mm  
Yes  
Yes  
*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to A.  
*2 The saved settings are reset only for [Reset USER Settings] in the [USER] screen.  
Playback Mode Palette  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Slideshow  
Yes  
Image Comparison  
Digital Filter  
*3  
Toy Camera  
Yes  
Maximum size  
according to the setting  
Resize  
Maximum size  
according to the setting  
Cropping  
Protect  
DPOF  
Index  
No  
No  
10  
File Format: JPEG  
Recorded Pixels: W  
Quality Level: C  
RAW Development  
Yes  
Image Rotation  
Save as Manual WB  
*3 The filter parameter settings can be saved or reset.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
287  
[Q Playback] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Interval  
3sec.  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Slideshow  
Screen Effect  
Repeat Playback  
Bright/Dark Area  
P (Off)  
P (Off)  
Playback  
Display  
Method  
Quick Zoom  
Off  
Yes  
Delete All Images  
[RSet-up] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
According to default  
setting  
No  
No  
Language/  
According to default  
setting  
Date Adjustment  
Setting the Time  
W (Hometown)  
Same as Hometown  
Same as Hometown  
Yes  
No  
Destination (City)  
Destination (DST)  
No  
World Time  
According to default  
setting  
Hometown (City)  
Hometown (DST)  
No  
No  
No  
According to default  
setting  
According to default  
setting  
Text Size  
Guide Display  
Beep  
3sec.  
All O (On)  
±0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
10  
Brightness Level  
LCD Color Tuning  
±0  
According to default  
setting  
Video Out  
No  
HDMI Out  
Auto  
MSC  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
File Name  
Date  
*4  
IMGP/_IGP  
No  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
288  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Copyright Information  
Auto Power Off  
P (Off)  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1min.  
Select Battery  
Auto Select  
Select  
Battery  
AA Battery Type  
Auto-detect  
Reset  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Alert  
Dust Removal  
Start-up Action  
Dust  
Removal  
O (On)  
Yes  
Sensor Cleaning  
Format  
*4 Reset only for [Reset File Name] in the [File Name] screen.  
[A Custom Setting] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
1. EV Steps  
1/3 EV Steps  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
2. Sensitivity Steps  
1 EV Step  
3. Expanded Sensitivity  
4. Meter Operating Time  
5. AE-L with AF Locked  
6. Link AE to AF Point  
Off  
10sec.  
Off  
Off  
7. One-Push Bracketing  
8. Auto Bracketing Order  
9. Auto EV Compensation  
10. WB When Using Flash  
11. WB Adjustable Range  
12. AWB in Tungsten Light  
13. AF Button Function  
14. AF with Press Halfway  
15. Superimpose AF Area  
16. AF with Remote Control  
17. Remote Control in Bulb  
Off  
0 - +  
Off  
Auto White Balance  
Auto Adjustment  
Subtle Correction  
Enable AF  
On  
10  
On  
Off  
Mode1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
289  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
18. Slow Shutter Speed NR  
19. High-ISO Noise Reduction  
20. High-ISO NR Start Level  
21. Color Temperature Steps  
22. e-dial in Program  
On  
Medium  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
ISO 800  
Kelvin  
Front: b Rear: c  
23. e-dial in Sv mode  
Front: -  
Front: b Rear: -  
Front: - Rear: c  
Front: b Rear: c  
Front: - Rear: c  
Program Line  
Rear: o  
24. e-dial in Tv mode  
25. e-dial in Av mode  
26. e-dial in TAv & M modes  
27. e-dial in B & X modes  
28. Green Button in TAv & M  
29. LCD Panel Illumination  
30. Release While Charging  
31. Flash in Wireless Mode  
32. AF Assist Light  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
33. Saving Rotation Info  
34. Auto Image Rotation  
35. Catch-in Focus  
On  
On  
Off  
*5  
36. AF Adjustment  
Off  
Yes  
37. Using Aperture Ring  
Reset Custom Functions  
Prohibited  
Yes  
*5 The saved adjustment value is reset only for [Reset] in the [36. AF Adjustment] screen.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
290  
Resetting the Menu  
Resetting Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menu  
Settings in [A Rec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [RSet-up] menu,  
direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default settings.  
Language/  
, Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,  
Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [A Custom Setting] menu  
settings are not reset.  
Reset function is not available when the mode dial is set to A.  
1
Select [Reset] in the [RSet-up 3] menu and press the four-  
way controller (5).  
The [Reset] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Reset] and press the  
4 button.  
Reset  
Returns to default settings  
The settings are reset, and the screen  
that was displayed before selecting the  
menu appears again.  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Resetting the Custom Menu  
10  
Reset settings in [A Custom Setting] menu to default settings.  
1
Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom  
Setting 6] menu and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
291  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Reset] and press the  
4 button.  
Reset Custom Functions  
Returns the custom function  
settings to default values  
The settings are reset, and the screen  
that was displayed before selecting the  
menu appears again.  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292  
Functions Available with Various  
Lens Combinations  
Only DA, DA L and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses having an s  
(Auto) position on the aperture ring can be used with factory default  
lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses with aperture ring set to a position other  
than s.  
z : Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the s position.  
# : Some functions are restricted.  
× : Functions are unavailable.  
DA  
FA J  
F*6  
A
M
P
Lens  
[Mount type]  
DA L FA*6  
D FA  
[KAF]  
[KAF]  
[KAF]  
[KA]  
[K]  
[KAF2] [KAF2]  
[KAF3]  
Function  
Autofocus  
(Lens only)  
(With AF adapter 1.7×)  
z
z
z
#
z
*1  
*8  
Manual focus  
(With the focus indicator)  
(With matte field)  
*2  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
*5  
Quick-Shift Focus System  
Eleven AF points  
#
×
×
×
×
×
×
*8  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
#
Multi-segment metering  
e (Hyper-program) mode  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
*9  
#
#
#
#
#
#
×
*9  
*9  
*9  
*9  
K(Sensitivity Priority) mode  
b (Shutter Priority) mode  
10  
c (Aperture Priority) mode  
L(Shutter & Aperture Priority) mode  
a (Hyper-manual) mode  
*3  
P-TTL Auto Flash  
*7  
Power Zoom  
Automatic obtaining the lens focal length  
information when using the Shake  
Reduction function  
z
z
z
z
×
×
×
×
*4  
Lens Correction function  
×
×
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
293  
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or brighter. Only available at s position.  
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or brighter.  
*3 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.  
*4 Aberration correction is available in [Lens Correction] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu. The  
[Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using the DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.  
*5 Only available with compatible lenses.  
*6 To use an F/FA SOFT 85 mm f/2.8 lens or FA SOFT 28 mm f/2.8 lens, set [37. Using  
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6] menu to [Permitted]. Pictures can be taken  
with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.  
*7 Only available with KAF2 mount FA lenses.  
*8 The AF point is fixed to U(Center).  
*9 c (Aperture Priority) Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (Adjusting the aperture  
ring has no effect on the actual aperture value.)  
Lens names and mount names  
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom  
use the KAF2 mount. DA lenses with ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler  
use the KAF3 mount.  
FA prime lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA and DA L lenses without  
ultrasonic motors and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF mount.  
See the lens manual for details.  
Lenses and accessories that cannot be used with this camera  
When the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position or a lens  
without an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or  
auto bellows are used, the camera does not operate unless [37. Using  
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6] menu is set to [Permitted].  
apply.  
All camera exposure modes are available when using DA/DA L/FA J or  
lenses with an Aperture s position set to the s position.  
10  
Lens and Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses  
not set to the s (Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.  
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
294  
Notes on [37. Using Aperture Ring]  
37. Using Aperture Ring  
[A Custom Setting 6] menu is set to  
[Permitted], the shutter can be released  
even if the aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or  
A lens is not set to the s (Auto) position or a  
lens without an s position is attached.  
However, the features will be restricted as  
shown below.  
1
2
Prohibited  
Permitted  
Shutter will release when  
aperture ring is not set to the  
"A" position  
Restrictions on using lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than  
s
Lens Used  
Exposure Mode  
Restriction  
The aperture remains open regardless  
of the aperture ring position. The  
c (Aperture shutter speed changes in relation to the  
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens  
only or with auto  
diaphragm accessories  
such as auto extension  
tube K)  
Priority)  
open aperture but an exposure error  
may occur. In the viewfinder, [F--]  
appears for the aperture indicator.  
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S  
(with diaphragm  
accessories such as  
extension tube K)  
c (Aperture  
Priority)  
Pictures can be taken with the  
specified aperture value but an  
exposure error may occur. In the  
viewfinder, [F--] appears for the  
aperture indicator.  
Manual diaphragm lens  
such as reflex lens (lens  
only)  
c (Aperture  
Priority)  
Pictures can be taken with the  
specified aperture value in the manual  
aperture range. In the viewfinder, [F--]  
appears for the aperture indicator.  
When depth of field is checked (Optical  
Preview), exposure metering starts.  
Exposure check is possible.  
FA, F SOFT 85mm FA  
SOFT 28mm (lens only) Priority)  
c (Aperture  
10  
Pictures can be taken with the set  
aperture value and shutter speed. In  
the viewfinder, [F--] appears for the  
aperture indicator.  
When depth of field is checked (Optical  
Preview), exposure metering starts.  
Exposure check is possible.  
a (Hyper-  
manual)  
All lenses  
The camera operates in c (Aperture Priority) mode even if the mode dial is at  
B, e, K, b or Lwhen the aperture is set to the position other than s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
295  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor  
Shadows may appear in the image for white backgrounds and other  
shooting conditions if the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty. This  
indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.  
Removing Dust with Ultrasonic Vibrations  
(Dust Removal)  
Dust adhering to the CMOS sensor is removed by applying ultrasonic  
vibrations to the filter on the front surface of the CMOS sensor for  
approximately one second.  
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the [RSet-up 4] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
Dust Removal  
The Dust Removal function is activated.  
Dust Removal  
Start-up Action  
Set [Start-up Action] to O (On) to turn the  
Dust Removal function on every time the  
camera is turned on. Use the four-way  
controller (45) to set to P (Off) if you do  
not want the function to be activated  
OK  
MENU  
Start  
when the camera is turned on.  
When the Dust Removal function is  
completed, the camera returns to the [RSet-up 4] menu.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
296  
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor (Dust  
Alert)  
Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor and  
visually displays the location of the dust.  
You can save the detected image and display it when performing sensor  
cleaning (p.297).  
The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:  
• A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA and F lens that has an Aperture  
s (Auto) position is attached.  
• The aperture is set to the s position when using a lens with an  
aperture ring.  
• Set the mode dial to any mode other than C (Movie).  
• Set the focus mode lever to l or A.  
1
Select [Dust Alert] in the [RSet-up 4] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Dust Alert] screen appears.  
2
Fully display a white wall or  
uniformly bright subject in the  
Dust Alert  
Checks for dust on the sensor.  
viewfinder and press the shutter  
release button fully.  
Press shutter release button  
to reveal dust location  
After image processing is performed, the  
[Dust Alert] screen appears.  
If [The operation could not be completed  
correctly] is displayed, press the 4  
button and take another picture.  
MENU  
SHUTTER  
Check  
10  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The image is saved and the camera  
return to the [RSet-up 4] menu.  
OK  
x1  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
297  
• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert  
function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing is  
complete, dust will not be detected properly.  
• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be  
detected properly.  
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30  
minutes from the time the image is saved. If 30 minutes elapse, save a new  
Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.  
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.  
• Dust Alert image cannot be saved when an SD Memory Card is not inserted.  
• Regardless of the camera settings, Dust Alert image will be taken with  
specific shooting conditions.  
• Press the M button or turn the rear e-dial (S) when displaying the Dust  
Alert image to view it at full screen display.  
Removing Dust with a Blower  
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter to clean with a blower.  
Please contact PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning  
because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve  
a fee.  
You can use the optional Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1 (p.303) when  
cleaning the CMOS sensor.  
• Do not use a spray type blower.  
• Do not clean the sensor when the mode dial is set to p.  
• Always cap the lens mount area to prevent dirt and dust from accumulating  
on the CMOS sensor when no lens is on the camera.  
• When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to clean  
sensor] is displayed on the monitor.  
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC50 (optional) when cleaning  
the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit K-AC50, please use a  
battery with ample capacity remaining. If the battery capacity becomes low  
during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. Please stop cleaning  
immediately.  
10  
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is  
turned off, this could cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor or the  
mirror.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
298  
• The self-timer lamp blinks and [Cln] appears on the LCD panel while cleaning  
the sensor.  
• The camera may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS  
sensor. It is not a malfunction.  
1
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
Turn the camera on.  
2
3
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [RSet-up 4] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (2)  
Sensor Cleaning  
to select [Mirror Up] and press  
Raises mirror and open shutter  
the 4 button.  
for access to clean sensor.  
Turn the power off to finish  
The mirror is locked in the up position.  
Mirror Up  
If you used the Dust Alert function to  
detect dust on the sensor within the last  
30 minutes, the Dust Alert image appears  
on the monitor. It allows you to clean the  
sensor while checking the location of the  
dust.  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Clean the CMOS sensor.  
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt  
and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a  
blower with a brush may scratch the  
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS  
sensor with a cloth.  
10  
6
7
Turn off the camera.  
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
299  
Optional Accessories  
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Please  
contact a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.  
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with  
the camera.  
Power Supply Accessories  
Battery Charger kit K-BC90 (*)  
(Set includes Battery charger D-BC90 and AC plug cord.)  
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI90 (*)  
AC Adapter kit K-AC50  
(Set includes AC Adapter D-AC50 and AC plug cord.)  
Lets you power your camera with the outlet when combined with the AC  
plug cord.  
Battery Grip D-BG4  
The Battery Grip has features such as a  
shutter release button, front e-dial, rear  
e-dial, and L button to  
accommodate shooting vertically. In  
addition to the rechargeable lithium-ion  
battery D-LI90, AA lithium/Ni-MH/  
alkaline batteries can also be used in  
the battery grip to power the camera.  
The AC adapter and battery charger are only sold as a set.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
300  
Flash Accessories  
Auto Flash AF540FGZ  
Auto Flash AF360FGZ  
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are P-  
TTL auto flash units with a maximum  
guide number of approximately 54 and  
36 (ISO 100/m), respectively. Their  
features include slave-sync flash,  
contrast-control-sync flash, auto flash,  
high-speed sync flash, wireless flash,  
slow-speed sync and trailing curtain  
sync flash.  
AF540FGZ  
AF360FGZ  
Auto Flash AF200FG  
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit  
with a maximum guide number of  
approximately 20 (ISO 100/m). It  
features contrast-control-sync flash and  
slow-speed sync flash when combined  
with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit.  
AF200FG  
Auto Macro Flash AF160FC  
The AF160FC is a flash system  
especially designed for macro  
10  
photography to take close, shadowless  
pictures of small objects. It is compatible  
with existing TTL auto flash functions  
and it can be used with a wide range of  
PENTAX cameras by using the provided  
adapter ring.  
AF160FC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
301  
Hot Shoe Adapter FG  
Extension Cord F5P  
Hot Shoe Adapter FG  
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F  
Use the adapters and cords to use the  
external flash away from the camera.  
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F  
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10  
When using the AF540FGZ or  
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, this  
large clip is used for setting the external  
flash on a desk or table.  
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10  
For Viewfinder  
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53  
This viewfinder accessory is for  
magnifying up to approximately 1.18  
times.  
When the eyecup is attached to the  
Q with a viewfinder magnification of  
approximately 0.92 times, the combined  
magnification becomes approximately  
1.09 times, making manual focusing  
much easier.  
Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53  
10  
Magnifier FB  
This viewfinder accessory is for  
magnifying the central area of the  
viewfinder 2×.  
You can see the entire view by simply  
flipping up the accessory from the eye-  
piece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.  
Magnifier FB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
302  
Ref-converter A  
This is an accessory that changes the  
viewfinder viewing angle at 90°  
intervals. The viewfinder magnification  
can be switched between 1× and 2×.  
Ref-converter A  
Diopter correction lens adapter M  
This accessory adjusts the diopter.  
Install it on the viewfinder.  
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder  
image clearly, choose one of the eight  
correction of approximately -5 to +3m-1  
(per meter).  
Diopter correction lens adapter M  
ME Viewfinder Cap (*)  
Eyecup FP (*)  
Interchangeable Focusing Screen  
AF Frame Matte MF-60 (*)  
AF Divided Matte ML-60  
M60  
M60  
10  
AF Scale Matte MI-60  
Plain Matte ME-60  
M60  
M60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
303  
Cable Switch CS-205  
Connect to the cable release terminal  
and operate the camera shutter release  
button. The cord length is 0.5 m.  
Remote Control F  
Used for remote control shooting.  
Operating distance for remote control  
From the front of camera: approx. 4 m  
From the back of camera:approx. 2 m  
Camera Case/Strap  
Camera Case O-CC90  
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)  
Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1  
Clean the optical parts such as the  
CMOS sensor and lens of this camera.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
304  
Others  
Body Mount Cap K  
Hot Shoe Cover FK (*)  
USB Cable I-USB7 (*)  
AV cable I-AVC7 (*)  
Sync Socket 2P Cap (*)  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
305  
Error Messages  
Error Message  
Description  
The SD Memory Card is full and no more images  
can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory Card or  
delete unwanted images. (p.49, p.79)  
Data may be saved when you perform the  
following operations.  
Memory card full  
• Change the file format to [JPEG]. (p.188)  
• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG  
Quality setting. (p.186, p.187)  
There are no images for playback on the SD  
Memory Card.  
No image  
You are trying to play back an image in a format  
not supported by this camera. You may be able to  
play it back on another brand of camera or on your  
computer.  
This image cannot be  
displayed  
The SD Memory Card is not inserted in the  
No card in the camera  
Memory card error  
The SD Memory Card has a problem, and image  
capture and playback are impossible. It may be  
viewable on a PC but not with this camera.  
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is  
unformatted or has been formatted on other device  
and is not compatible with this camera. Use the  
card after formatting it with this camera. (p.256)  
Card is not formatted  
Card is locked  
The write-protect switch on the SD Memory Card  
you have inserted is locked. Unlock the SD  
Memory Card. (p.50)  
The card is  
electronically locked  
Data are protected by the SD Memory Card  
security feature.  
10  
This image cannot be  
enlarged  
You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot be  
enlarged.  
You are trying to delete an image that is protected.  
Remove protection from the image. (p.231)  
This image is protected  
Battery depleted  
The battery is exhausted. Install a charged battery  
in the camera. (p.43)  
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery level  
is insufficient. Replace the battery with a fully  
charged one or use an AC adaptor kit K-AC50  
(optional). (p.47)  
Not enough battery  
power remaining to  
clean sensor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
306  
Error Message  
Description  
Appears during pixel mapping if the battery level is  
insufficient. Replace the battery with a fully  
charged one or use an AC adaptor kit K-AC50  
(optional). (p.47)  
Not enough battery  
power remaining to  
activate Pixel Mapping  
The maximum folder number (999) and file  
number (9999) are being used, and no more  
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory  
Card or format the card. (p.256)  
Image folder cannot be  
created  
The image could not be saved because of an SD  
Memory Card error.  
Unable to store image  
Settings not stored  
The DPOF settings or rotation information could  
not be saved because SD Memory Card is full.  
Delete unwanted images and perform DPOF  
settings or rotation again. (p.79)  
The camera was unable to measure the manual  
white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try the  
operation again. (p.194, p.296)  
The operation could not be  
completed correctly  
You cannot select 100 or more images at a time for  
Index (p.219), Select & Delete (p.227) and  
Developing Selected Images (p.248).  
No more images can be  
selected  
Appears when Save as Manual WB (p.198),  
Resize (p.238), Cropping (p.239), Digital Filter  
(p.241), or RAW Development (p.247) is started  
for images captured with other cameras, or when  
Resize or Cropping is started for minimum size  
images.  
This image cannot be  
processed  
The camera failed to create  
an image  
The creation of an index print image failed. (p.219)  
Camera overheated.  
Disabling Live View  
temporarily  
Live View cannot be used because the camera’s  
internal temperature is too high. Press the 4  
button and try using Live View again when the  
camera has cooled down.  
to protect circuitry  
10  
This function is  
not available in  
the current mode  
You are trying to set a function that is not available  
in B(Green) or C (Movie) mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
307  
Troubleshooting  
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static  
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting them  
back in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the battery  
out and put them back in again. Then, turn the power on. The mirror will  
retract. After these procedures are done, if the camera operates correctly,  
it does not require any repairs.  
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service  
center.  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The battery is not  
installed  
Check if a battery is installed. If not, install a  
charged battery.  
The camera  
does not  
turn on  
The battery power is Replace with charged battery or use the AC  
low  
adapter kit K-AC50 (optional). (p.47)  
Set the lens aperture ring to the s position  
(p.95) or select [Permitted] in [37. Using  
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 6]  
menu. (p.294)  
The lens aperture  
ring setting is other  
than the s position  
The shutter  
does not  
release  
The flash is charging Wait until charging is finished.  
There is no available Insert an SD Memory Card with available  
space on the SD  
Memory Card  
space or delete unwanted images. (p.49,  
p.79)  
Recording  
Wait until recording is finished.  
Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects  
that have low contrast (the sky, white walls),  
dark colors, intricate designs, rapidly-  
moving objects or scenery shot through a  
window or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on  
another object located at the same distance  
as your subject, then aim at target and press  
the shutter release button fully.  
The subject is  
difficult to focus on  
10  
The  
autofocus  
does not  
work  
Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.126)  
Position the subject in the focus frame in the  
middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is  
The subject is not in outside the focusing area, aim the camera  
the focusing area  
at the subject and lock the focus, then  
compose a picture and press the shutter  
release button fully. (p.124)  
The subject is too  
close  
Move away from the subject and take a  
picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
308  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The focus mode is  
set to \  
Set the focus mode lever to l or A.  
(p.118)  
Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when  
the focus mode is set to k (A). The  
camera will continue focusing on the subject  
while the shutter release button is pressed  
halfway. If there is a subject that you wish to  
focus on, slide the focus mode lever to l  
and use the focus lock. (p.124)  
The  
autofocus  
does not  
work  
The focus mode is  
set to k  
AE lock  
function  
does not  
operate  
Set the exposure mode to any mode other  
than B(Green), p (Bulb) or M(Flash X-  
sync Speed).  
AE lock is not  
available when set  
to B, p or Mmode.  
Only C(Auto Flash Discharge) and D  
(Auto Flash+Red-eye Reduction) are  
available for the flash mode when the  
exposure mode is B(Green). The flash will  
not discharge when the subject is bright in  
these modes. In the exposure modes other  
than B, only the flash mode that  
The flash  
does not  
discharge  
The exposure mode  
is set to Bmode  
discharges every time the flash recharges is  
available. Try different exposure modes.  
The USB  
connection  
with a  
computer  
does not  
work  
Set [USB Connection] in the [RSet-up 2]  
menu to [MSC]. (p.275)  
Refer to the provided “Quick Guide” for  
details on connecting the camera to a  
computer.  
TheUSBconnection  
mode is set to [PTP]  
properly  
The Shake  
Reduction function  
is off  
Set [Shake Reduction] in the [A Rec. Mode  
4] menu to k(On). (p.132)  
If a lens for which focal length information  
cannot be obtained is used, set [Focal  
Length] in the [Input Focal Length] menu.  
(p.135)  
The Shake  
Reduction function  
is not set properly  
10  
Shake  
Reduction  
does not  
work  
Shutter speed is too  
low for the Shake  
Reduction function Turn off the Shake Reduction function and  
to be effective when use a tripod.  
panning or shooting  
night scenes, etc.  
The subject is too  
close  
Move away from the subject, or turn off the  
Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
309  
Main Specifications  
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera with  
built-in retractable P-TTL flash  
Type  
Effective Pixels  
Image Sensor  
Approx. 14.6 megapixels  
Total pixels approx. 15.07 megapixels, CMOS with a primary  
color filter  
W (RAW: 4672×3104 pixels), W (JPEG: 4672×3104  
pixels), J(3936×2624 pixels), P (3072×2048 pixels), i  
(1728×1152 pixels)  
Recorded Pixels  
Auto, ISO 100 to 3200 (Standard output sensitivity) (EV steps  
can be set to 1 EV, 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV), ISO 6400 is available  
with the custom function setting, up to ISO 1600 is available  
during p  
Sensitivity (Standard  
output sensitivity)  
RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF 2.0 compliant,  
DPOF compatible, Print Image Matching III compatible,  
RAW+JPEG simultaneous capturing compatible, Movie: AVI  
File Format  
JPEG Quality  
Z(Premium), C (Best), D (Better), and E (Good)  
Storage Medium  
SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card  
Approximate Number of Storable Images  
SD Memory Card capacity  
2 GB 1 GB 512 MB 256 MB 128 MB  
Recorded File Format/  
Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
4 GB  
162  
(PEF)  
82  
82  
40  
40  
20  
20  
10  
10  
5
5
|
|
W
4672×3104  
(DNG)  
161  
292  
148  
238  
420  
830  
208  
332  
585  
1138  
339  
543  
945  
1807  
73  
36  
18  
9
Z
467  
117  
206  
408  
102  
163  
289  
564  
167  
267  
468  
902  
58  
29  
15  
26  
52  
13  
21  
37  
73  
21  
34  
60  
116  
C
D
E
W
4672×3104  
826  
103  
204  
51  
52  
1630  
409  
102  
25  
Z
C
D
E
652  
81  
41  
10  
J
3936×2624  
1149  
2234  
666  
144  
282  
83  
72  
142  
42  
Z
C
D
E
1068  
1856  
3549  
133  
234  
450  
67  
P
3072×2048  
118  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
310  
SD Memory Card capacity  
2 GB 1 GB 512 MB 256 MB 128 MB  
Recorded File Format/  
Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
4 GB  
2045  
3176  
5485  
10057  
1041  
1617  
2793  
5121  
516  
805  
258  
402  
130  
203  
346  
634  
66  
104  
177  
325  
Z
C
D
i
1728×1152  
1373  
2518  
686  
1258  
E
JPEG Quality (Compression): Z(Premium) = 1/2.8, C (Best) = 1/4.5, D (Better)  
= 1/8, E (Good) = 1/16  
• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions,  
shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.  
Approximate Movie Recording Time  
SD Memory Card capacity  
Recorded  
Quality  
Pixels  
4 GB  
2 GB  
1 GB 512 MB 256 MB 128 MB  
7 min. 3 min. 1 min.  
23 sec. 45 sec. 51 sec.  
55 sec. 28 sec. 14 sec.  
C
D
E
F
1536×1024  
10 min. 5 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
22 sec. 16 sec. 36 sec. 18 sec.  
39 sec. 20 sec.  
55 sec. 28 sec.  
35 sec. 18 sec.  
50 sec. 25 sec.  
14 min. 7 min. 3 min. 1 min.  
40 sec. 28 sec. 40 sec. 50 sec.  
9 min. 4 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
26 sec. 48 sec. 21 sec. 10 sec.  
C
D
E
X
1280×720  
13 min. 6 min. 3 min. 1 min.  
19 sec. 47 sec. 20 sec. 40 sec.  
18 min. 9 min. 4 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
37 sec. 29 sec. 41 sec. 20 sec. 10 sec.  
36 sec.  
31 min. 16 min. 7 min. 3 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
55 sec. 15 sec. 59 sec. 59 sec. 00 sec. 01 sec.  
C
D
44 min. 22 min. 11 min. 5 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
41 sec. 45 sec. 11 sec. 35 sec. 49 sec. 26 sec.  
Y
640×416  
1 hr.  
31 min. 15 min. 7 min. 3 min. 2 min.  
02 sec. 29 sec. 44 sec. 54 sec. 00 sec.  
00 min.  
57 sec.  
E
10  
• Movie recording time is based on our measuring conditions. The above figures may vary  
depending on the subject, shooting conditions and SD Memory Card, etc.  
Auto, Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight Color,  
N: Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White), Tungsten Light,  
Flash, CTE, Manual, Color Temperature (3 types), fine tuning  
White Balance  
available  
3.0-inch wide viewing field TFT color LCD with approx. 921,000 dots,  
brightness and color adjustment functions  
Monitor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
311  
Single frame, multi-image display, zoom display (up to 32 times,  
scrolling possible), image comparison, rotating, calendar display,  
folder display, slideshow, histogram, bright/dark area, resize,  
cropping, index (Thumbnail/Square/Random1/Random2/Random3/  
Bubble)  
Playback  
Function  
A, BGreen, e Hyper-program, KSensitivity priority, b  
Shutter priority, c Aperture priority, LShutter & Aperture priority,  
a Hyper-manual, p Bulb, M Flash X-sync Speed, C Movie  
Exposure  
Mode  
Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter, Speed  
range (1) Auto 1/8000 to 30 sec. (stepless), (2) Manual 1/8000 to 30  
sec. (1/2 EV steps or 1/3 EV steps), Bulb, Electromagnetic release,  
Shutter lock by setting main switch in OFF position  
Shutter  
PENTAX KAF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information contacts,  
K-mount with power contacts)  
Lens Mount  
Lens Used  
PENTAX KAF3 mount lenses, KAF2 mount lenses, KAF mount lenses,  
KA mount lenses  
TTL phase-matching autofocus system (SAFOX VIII+), AF  
operational brightness range: EV -1 to 18 (at ISO 100 with f/1.4 lens),  
Focus lock available, Focus Mode: l (Single)/k  
(Continuous)/\, Adjustable AF point  
Autofocus  
System  
Pentaprism Finder, Interchangeable Natural-Bright-Matte III focusing  
screen, Field of view: approx. 100%, Magnification: approx. 0.92×  
(with 50 mm f/1.4 lens at ), Diopter: approx. -2.5m to +1.5m  
(per meter)  
Viewfinder  
-1  
-1  
Focus information: ] is lit when in-focus and blinking when unable  
to focus, b is lit = Built-in flash ready, b is blinking = Flash should  
be used or incompatible lens is being used, Shutter speed, Confirm  
Sensitivity, Aperture value, e-dial enabled indicator, @ = AE lock,  
Remaining capacity, m = EV compensation/Exposure Bracketing,  
N= Flash exposure compensation, \ = Manual focus,  
k= Shake Reduction display, V = Multi-exposure,  
M = Metering method, V = Change AF point, EV bar, Electronic  
Level, RAW/RAW+  
Viewfinder  
Indication  
b is lit = Built-in flash ready, b is blinking = Flash should be used or  
incompatible lens is being used, 3 = Auto flash discharge,  
>=Red-eye reduction, Q = Slow-speed sync, E = Trailing  
Curtain Sync, 9 = Single frame shooting, j = Continuous shooting,  
g = Self-timer, W= Remote control shooting, ? = Battery  
exhaustion warning, N= Flash exposure compensation, Confirm  
sensitivity, Shutter speed, Aperture value, Remaining capacity,  
m = EV compensation, Pc-S (mass storage)/Pc-P (PTP) appears  
when the USB cable is connected, EV bar, Electronic Level, 1,  
1P  
10  
LCD Panel  
Display  
Live View:  
TTL method using the image sensor, Zoom Display  
and Show Grid are usable  
Preview  
Function  
Optical Preview:Depth of field confirmation (electronically controlled  
and usable in all exposure modes)  
Digital Preview: Composition, exposure, focus and white balance  
confirmation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
312  
Up to approx. 5.2 fps, JPEG: up to 40 frames (Hi) / until SD Memory  
Card is full (Lo), RAW: up to 15 frames (PEF, Hi) / up to 14 frames  
(DNG, Hi)  
Continuous  
Shooting (Hi/Lo)  
Electronically controlled with delay time of 12 sec./2 sec. (with mirror  
lock-up function). Start by pressing the shutter release button.  
Operation confirmation: Possible to set beep. Can be cancelled after  
operation  
Self-timer  
PENTAX Remote Control F (optional) Release shutter immediately  
Remote Control or three seconds after pressing the remote control shutter release  
button  
Mirror  
Quick-return mirror, mirror lock-up function  
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft, Star Burst,  
Fish-eye, Monochrome, Color, Water Color, Pastel, Slim, Miniature,  
HDR, Base Parameter Adj, Custom Filter  
Digital Filter  
Image Tone (7 types), Saturation, Hue, Contrast, Sharpness/Fine  
Sharpness, High/Low Key Adj, Filter Effect, Toning  
Custom Image  
Three or five frames (underexposed, proper exposure and  
overexposed) are shot continuously with exposure bracketing.  
(Selectable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV for EV steps)  
Exposure  
Bracketing  
Extended  
Bracketing  
Three frames are saved continuously with white balance, saturation,  
hue, high/low key adjustment, contrast and sharpness bracketing.  
Select the number of shots between 2 and 9 (Auto EV Adjustment  
can be set according to the number of shots)  
Multi-exposure  
TTL multi (77-segment metering), Exposure range from EV 0 to EV  
22 at ISO 100, with 50 mm f/1.4 lens, Center-weighted and Spot  
metering mode can be set  
Exposure Meter/  
Exposure Range  
EV  
±5 levels, EV Steps can be selected  
Compensation  
Button type (timer type: two times the meter operating time set in  
Custom Function) Continuous as long as the shutter button is  
halfway pressed.  
AE Lock  
P-TTL built-in flash with serial control, GN approx. 13 (ISO 100 • m),  
Angles of coverage: 18 mm lens angle of view, Flash synchronization  
speed range at 1/180 sec. and slower, Daylight-sync flash, Slow-  
speed-sync flash, ISO range = P-TTL: 100 to 6400  
Built-in Flash  
10  
Hot shoe with M-contact, which couples with PENTAX dedicated  
auto flashes, ISO range = P-TTL: 100 to 1600, Automatic flash, Red-  
eye reduction flash function, High-speed flash sync and wireless-  
sync with PENTAX dedicated flash  
External Flash  
Sync  
Custom Function 37 functions can be set  
Time Function  
World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)  
Shake Reduction Image Sensor Shift, effective compensation range = up to 4 EV  
Function  
(dependent on the used lens type and shooting conditions)  
Ultrasonic vibrations for dust removal. Can be set to operate when  
the camera is turned on.  
Dust Removal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
313  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90, AC adapter kit K-AC50  
(optional)  
Power  
*1  
Number of recordable images: approx. 980 images (without flash) /  
*2  
approx. 740 images (50% flash usage) , playback time: approx. 440  
*1  
minutes  
*1 The number of recordable images (without flash) and playback time  
are based on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the  
above figures may occur in actual use depending on usage conditions.  
*2 The number of recordable images (50% flash usage) is based on  
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards. Some  
deviation from the above figures may occur in actual use depending  
on usage conditions.  
Battery Life  
(23°C)  
Battery  
Battery exhaustion indicator ? is lit. (The shutter is locked and no  
Exhaustion  
indication appears in the viewfinder when ? starts blinking.)  
PC/AV terminal (USB 2.0 (high speed compatible)), mini HDMI  
terminal, DC input terminal, Cable release terminal, Microphone  
terminal, X-sync socket  
In/Out Port  
Video Output  
Format  
NTSC/PAL  
Approx. 130.5 mm (W) × 96.5 mm (H) × 72.5 mm (D) (excluding  
Dimensions and protrusions)  
Weight  
670 g (body only), 750 g (including a battery and an SD Memory  
Card)  
Hot shoe cover FK, Eyecup FR, ME viewfinder cap, Sync socket 2P  
cap, Body mount cover, USB Cable I-USB7, AV cable I-AVC7,  
Software (CD-ROM) S-SW90 (PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4),  
Strap O-ST53, Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI90, Battery  
charger D-BC90, AC plug cord, Operating Manual (this book), Quick  
Guide  
Accessories  
Languages  
English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,  
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek,  
Russian, Korean, Chinese (Traditional/Simplified) and Japanese  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
314  
Glossary  
AdobeRGB  
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial  
printing. Wider range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of the  
color range so colors only available when printed are not lost when editing  
images on a computer. When image is opened by non-compatible  
software, the colors look lighter.  
Aperture  
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing  
through the lens to the CMOS sensor.  
Auto Bracket  
For automatically changing exposure. When the shutter release button is  
pressed, three images are captured. The first one has no compensation,  
the second is underexposed and the third is overexposed. This camera  
features Exposure Bracketing that captures images in different exposures,  
and Extended Bracketing that captures images with set White Balance,  
Saturation, Hue, High/Low Key Adjustment, Contrast and Sharpness  
levels.  
Bright portions  
Overexposed area in the image loses contrast and appears white.  
Camera Shake (Blur)  
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image  
appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.  
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, and  
raising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize the  
camera. As camera shake is mostly likely to occur when pressing the  
shutter release button, use the Shake Reduction function, the self-timer or  
the remote control unit to prevent camera movement.  
10  
CMOS Sensor  
Photography element which converts the light entering through the lens  
into electric signals that create the image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
315  
Color Space  
A defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital  
cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,  
[AdobeRGB] is also used because of the richer color expression over  
sRGB.  
Color Temperature  
This numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the  
subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.  
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, and  
to a reddish color as the color temperature falls.  
Dark portions  
Underexposed area in the image loses contrast and appears black.  
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)  
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics  
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).  
Depth of Field  
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture, lens focal length, and  
distance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture (higher  
number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture (smaller  
number) to decrease the depth of field.  
DNG RAW file  
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by  
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats are  
converted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images  
increases significantly.  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)  
10  
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding  
the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily  
be made by taking images to a DPOF photo printing store.  
Dynamic Range (D-Range)  
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.  
This is the same as the term “latitude” used with silver halide film.  
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, it is difficult for bright and dark  
areas to occur in the image, and when the dynamic range is narrow, a  
higher contrast image can be achieved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
316  
EV (Exposure Value)  
Exposure value is determined by the combination of the aperture value  
and the shutter speed.  
EV Compensation  
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed  
and/or aperture value.  
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)  
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics  
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).  
Exif-JPEG format  
Exif stands for Exchangeable Image File Format. This image file format is  
based on the JPEG image data format, and allows thumbnail images and  
image properties to be embedded into the data. Software that does not  
support this format processes the image as a regular JPEG image.  
Exif-TIFF format  
Exif stands for Exchangeable Image File Format. This image file format is  
based on the TIFF image data format, and allows thumbnail images and  
image properties to be embedded into the data. Software that does not  
support this format processes the image as a regular TIFF image.  
Focus point  
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, select  
from Auto, Select and Center.  
Histogram  
A graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The  
horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents  
the number of pixels. This is useful when you wish to refer to the exposure  
status of an image.  
10  
JPEG  
An image compression format. Although the image quality deteriorates a  
little, images can be compressed to a smaller file size than with TIFF and  
other formats. In this camera, select from Z(Premium), C (Best),  
D (Better), or E (Good). Images recorded in JPEG format are suited for  
viewing on your PC or for attaching to e-mail.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
317  
Metering Method  
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera,  
select from Multi-segment Metering, Center-weighted Metering and Spot  
Metering.  
Mired  
Proportional scale of measurement that consistently shows color change  
per unit. Determined by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by  
1,000,000.  
ND (Neutral Density) Filter  
A filter with many saturation levels that adjusts the brightness without  
affecting the color tone of pictures.  
Noise Reduction  
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by  
slow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.  
NTSC/PAL  
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North  
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and in China.  
PNG format  
Images saved using this format can be compressed to a small file size, but  
the reversible compression of this format makes the file size larger than  
JPEG. This format is for use with full-color images and prevents quality  
loss even when re-edited. PNG files, however, cannot be viewed on older  
browsers (Internet Explorer 3.0 or earlier or Internet Explorer 4.5 on  
Macintosh). In addition, thumbnail images and image properties cannot be  
embedded in the data.  
10  
Quality Level  
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression,  
the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as the  
compression rate rises.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
318  
RAW data  
Unedited image data output from the CMOS sensor. RAW data is data  
before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at the  
time of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, and  
Sharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW data  
are 12 bit data that contain 16 times the information of 8 bit JPEG data.  
Rich gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer and  
use the provided software to create image data with different settings,  
such as JPEG or TIFF.  
Recorded Pixels  
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels  
that compose a picture, the larger the image size.  
Sensitivity  
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shot  
with a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.  
However, images with high sensitivity are more susceptible to noise.  
Shutter Speed  
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the CMOS  
sensor. The amount of light that strikes the CMOS sensor can be changed  
by altering the shutter speed.  
sRGB (standard RGB)  
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International  
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for  
computer monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.  
Vignetting  
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from the  
subject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially  
blocked by the lens.  
10  
White Balance  
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source so  
that the subject appears to have correct color.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
319  
Index  
Automatic Sensitivity Correction  
............................................... 90  
Symbols  
B
Base Parameter Adj (Digital  
A
C
CMOS sensor plane indicator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
320  
Contrast-Control-Sync (Flash)  
.............................................182  
E
D
F
Filter Effect (Custom Image)  
............................................. 205  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
321  
Flash Exposure Compensation  
...............................................76  
High-Speed Flash Sync Mode  
............................................. 175  
Flash X-sync Speed ModeM  
.............................................112  
Fluorescent Light (White  
I
Balance) ...............................191  
J
G
K
L
H
10  
High/Low Key Adjustment  
(Custom Image) ...................205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
322  
M
P
10  
Q
N
R
O
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
323  
Remaining image storage  
capacity ..................................46  
T
S
Sensitivity Priority Mode K  
Tungsten Light (White Balance)  
............................................. 191  
...............................................98  
Sharpness (Custom Image)  
U
V
.............................................205  
Shutter & Aperture Priority Mode  
L ......................................104  
10  
W
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
325  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
326  
WARRANTY POLICY  
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide  
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of  
material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of  
purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced  
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not  
show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,  
battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,  
or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its  
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations  
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for  
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential  
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or  
workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of  
the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,  
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts  
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-  
authorized PENTAX service facilities.  
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period  
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period  
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment  
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer  
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage  
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the  
equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs  
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will  
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be  
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not  
covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its  
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.  
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to  
have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing  
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that  
country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer  
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty  
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance  
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
327  
required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your  
equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,  
please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized  
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it  
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service  
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the  
service station to proceed with the servicing.  
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory  
rights.  
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in  
some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we  
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your  
product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor  
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the  
warranty policy.  
10  
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European  
Union.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
328  
For customers in USA  
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject  
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
For customers in Canada  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003  
du Canada.  
10  
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY  
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.  
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,  
which may require special handling.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of Conformity  
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for  
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals  
We:  
PENTAX Imaging Company  
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.  
th  
Located at:  
600 12 Street, Suite 300  
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.  
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131  
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein  
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital  
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested  
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained  
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be  
within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the  
statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above  
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with  
the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.  
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera  
Model Number: Q  
Contact person: Customer Service Manager  
Date and Place: May, 2009, Colorado  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old  
Equipment and Used Batteries  
1. In the European Union  
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or  
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and  
electronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed with  
general household waste.  
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must be  
treated separately and in accordance with legislation that  
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these  
products.  
Following the implementation by member states, private  
households within the EU states may return their used  
electrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designated  
collection facilities free of charge*.  
In some countries your local retailer may also take back your  
old product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.  
*Please contact your local authority for further details.  
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that  
the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and  
recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the  
environment and human health which could otherwise arise  
due to inappropriate waste handling.  
2. In other countries outside the EU  
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you  
wish to discard these items, please contact your local  
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.  
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be  
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don't  
purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed  
on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.  
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):  
This symbol might be used in combination with a designation  
for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you  
have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for the  
chemicals involved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOYA CORPORATION  
PENTAX Imaging Systems Division  
2-36-9, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN  
(http://www.pentax.jp)  
PENTAX Europe GmbH  
Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg, GERMANY  
(European Headquarters) (HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)  
(Germany - http://www.pentax.de)  
PENTAX U.K. Limited  
PENTAX France S.A.S.  
PENTAX (Schweiz) AG  
PENTAX Imaging Company  
PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks  
SL3 8PN, U.K.  
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)  
112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,  
FRANCE  
(http://www.pentax.fr)  
Widenholzstrasse 1, 8304 Wallisellen, Postfach 367,  
8305 Dietlikon, SWITZERLAND  
(http://www.pentax.ch)  
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.  
(Headquarters)  
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401, U.S.A.  
(PENTAX Service Department)  
12061 Tejon St. STE 600 Westminster, Colorado 80234,  
U.S.A. (http://www.pentaximaging.com)  
PENTAX Canada Inc.  
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,  
CANADA (http://www.pentax.ca)  
PENTAX Trading  
(SHANGHAI) Limited  
23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,  
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA  
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)  
http://www.pentax.jp/english  
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.  
53495  
Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2009  
H02-200905 Printed in Philippines  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pentax Camcorder Optio WS80 User Manual
Philips Car Satellite TV System 32PFL3406H User Manual
Philips Cassette Player AW 7690 User Manual
Philips Smoke Alarm 32PW6312 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo Receiver VSX D512 K User Manual
PoGo Products Digital Photo Frame PPF100M4 User Manual
Porter Cable Air Compressor D26126 024 0 User Manual
Powermate Portable Generator PMC645500 User Manual
Princeton Computer Monitor VL2018W User Manual
ProForm Treadmill PFTL814050 User Manual